Notice: Function WP_Interactivity_API::_process_directives was called incorrectly. Interactivity directives failed to process in "" due to a missing "DD" end tag. Please see Debugging in WordPress for more information. (This message was added in version 6.6.0.) in /home/wimarys/Wim_Arys_photography/public_html/wp-includes/functions.php on line 6114
tips and tricks – Page 22 – Wim Arys

Category: tips and tricks

Category for advanced manuals with tips, tricks and a full menu run-through for mirrorless cameras from Sony, Fuji, Canon, Nikon, Samsung, Panasonic, Olympus, Ricoh/Pentax, Sigma.

  • Sony A6500: settings, tips and tricks

    Sony A6500: settings, tips and tricks

    Introduction

    Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony A6500. The latest and greatest mirrorless APS-C camera from Sony features many new enhancements like a 5 axis stabilized sensor, a touch screen and an extended buffer for continuous shooting. If you’re looking for an advanced guide

    If you’re looking for an advanced guide for the Sony A6500 with tips and tricks to improve your understanding of this little wonder, you’ve come to the right place. I believe that the best way to learn all the features and functions is to have a good look at the menu system and gradually try to understand how everything works. This might take some time if you’ve never owned a Sony mirrorless, and even if you have, the menus have totally changed it this product. You can bookmark this page and simply refer back to it or continue reading whenever you feel like it.

    If you are looking for an an A6000,  A6100A6300,  A6400 or A6600 guide, guide, you can find them by clicking on the camera name.

    So take your ILCE-A6500, press the Menu button and follow along.

    Sony A6500 Menu run-through

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 1 

    red camera icon page 1
    Quality and image size settings page 1
    Quality:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony A6500 pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.

    Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable (when you set Quality to jpeg). Set it to large for optimal quality, if SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Knowing the pixel size can tell you how large you can print your images without quality degradation. There are techniques nowadays to print larger, but this information might be interesting to some.

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 3:2:

    • L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels
    • M: 12M 4240×2832 pixels
    • S: 6M 3008×2000 pixels

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:

    • L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels
    • M: 10M 4240×2400 pixels
    • S:5.1M 3008×1688 pixels
    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface) or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    Panorama Size:

    (when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the Sony A6500 to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the Sony A6500 to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    (MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 2)

    red camera icon page 2
    Quality settings page 1
    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

    Lens Comp

    The Sony A6500 allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance. 

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 3

    Shoot and Drive mode settings page 1red camera icon page 3
    Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 1
    Auto Mode

    Switch the auto mode between Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto.

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.

    These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.

    The Sony A6500 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).

    Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button.

    Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).

    Superior Auto:

    Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing.

    This includes composite layering (layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures) and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image.

    You can either choose whether you want the Sony A6500 to save all images captured or just the composite image, by selecting S. Auto Img. Extract in the MENU system.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is (like in iAuto) fixed and only useable for jpeg shooting.

    Scene Selection

    This is more easily controlled via the right thumb wheel when you’re in SCN mode, but you can also select the presets for different scenes (like sports or portrait) from here.

    S Auto Img Extract

    When in Superior Auto, the Sony A6500 takes multiple images and combines them into one (jpeg only). You can either save all images captured (OFF) or only the combined image (ON). Turn it OFF; I’ve tried this functionality, and the combined image feature does not work well.

    Drive Mode

    Do you want to take a single picture when you press the shutter button or multiple images? You can select this here, as well as self-timer functions and bracketing.

    Bracketing is taking a series of pictures, each with different settings, useful for combining your images with various exposures for HDR effects in software afterwards, to name just one example.

    You can also press the dedicated drive mode button to get to these settings.

    • Single Shooting: Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and color filter.
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 4

    red camera icon page 4
    Shoot Mode and Drive settings page 2
    Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the Sony A6500. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 5

    red camera icon page 5
    autofocus settings page 1
    Focus Mode:

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    • AF-S: With a half-press of the shutter button, the Sony A6500 will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.
    • AF-A: AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard setting and the easiest to use.
    • AF-C: The Sony A6500 will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.
    • DMF: The Sony A6500 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.
    • MF: No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    You can see a focus indicator on screen or EVF. When it is lit, the subject is in Focus and focus is locked.

    Tip: if autofocus doesn’t seem to be working, check the lens barrel to see if the AF/MF slider is set to AF. It’s also possible to assign a button for what is called ‘Focus Hold’. With Focus Hold, you can freeze your focus point when you press this button. This is often used by photographers to allow for a greater flexibility in composition.

    Another important fact is that in Movie mode, only Continuous AF and MF are available.

    Priority Set in AF-S:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.

    Options are:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    Priority Set in AF-C:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion.

    Choose between:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
    Focus area

    The Sony A6500 has a dual phase/contrast on-sensor autofocus system This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    • Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
    • Zone: Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
    • Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony A6500 to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
    • Flexible spot: Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the touch screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the Sony A6500 will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
    • Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    • Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the Sony A6500 tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot.

    Tip: You can move the focus area in Flexible Spot, Expand Flexible Spot or Zone by touching the screen.

    AF illuminator

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony A6500 to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

    Center Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the Sony A6500 is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 6

    red camera icon page 6
    autofocus settings page 2
    AF system:

    Here you can select the focus detection system (Phase Detection AF/Contrast AF) when you attach an Amount lens using an LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor.

    • Phase Detection AF: Focuses with Phase Detection AF. The focusing speed is very fast.
    • Contrast AF: Always focuses with Contrast AF. The focusing speed is slower but more precise. Use when you cannot focus with Phase Detection AF.
    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    Pre-AF 

    Select if the Sony A6500 will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

    Eye-Start AF:

    This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.

    AF Area Auto Clear:

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

    Disp. cont. AF Area

    You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when[Focus Area] is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 7

    red camera icon page 7
    autofocus settings page 3
    AF Micro Adj.:

    Allows you to adjust and register autofocused positions for each lens when using an A-mount lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4. In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focus areas or focal lengths. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths.

    MENU –Red Camera Icon – page 8

    red camera icon page 8
    Exposure settings page 1
    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

    I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO,  you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

    Iso Auto Min SS.

    This is a useful and exciting setting. If you select ISO AUTO you are in  P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority) mode; you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing. The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.

    You have three possibilities here:

    • FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard (normal). This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the Sony A6500 is capable of doing so.
    • STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
    • SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.
    • 1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the Sony A6500 reads the light and sets the exposure.

    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

    In spot or center, the Sony A6500 only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

    Tip: When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

    Spot Metering Point

    Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

    • Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
    • Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

    Exposure step

    You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 9

    red camera icon page 9
    Exposure settings page 2
    AEL w shutter

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The Sony A6500 keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    Exposure Std. Adjust

    Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 10

    red camera icon page 10
    flash settings
    Flash Mode

    If you’re interested in flash photography, you’ll need to purchase a hot shoe flash. I would suggest a Godox, as these can both use HSS and TTL, and are quite cheap. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button

    If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
    • Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the Sony A6500 to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    • Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

    Exp comp set

    Selects if the Exposure compensation function (+-5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 11

    red camera icon page 11
    Color, White Balance, and Image processing settings page 1
    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Priority Set in AWB

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    • Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
    • Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
    • White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.

    • Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    • Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
    • Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
    • Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
    • Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
    • Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

    You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.

    This functionality can be changed:

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony A6500, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    Picture Profile

    Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.

    The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of [Gamma] (gamma curve) and [Color Mode] (color characteristics) settings.

    Gamma:
      • Movie: Standard gamma curve for video.
      • Still: Standard gamma curve for still images.
      • Cine1: Softens the contrast in darker image areas and emphasizes gradation changes in lighter image areas, producing a subdued tone overall (equivalent to HG4609G33) Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 33% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 109%. Images shot with this gamma can be used without grading, but since the images have smooth gradation characteristics, this can be used to grade and finalize the viewed image in the post-production process.
      • Cine2: Similar results to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal (equivalent to HG4600G30)
        Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 30% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 100%.
      • Cine3: Stronger contrast between dark and light image areas and greater emphasis on black gradation changes (compared to [Cine1] and [Cine2])
      • Cine4: Stronger contrast than [Cine3] in darker image areas.
      • ITU709 ITU709 gamma curve (low-light gain of 4.5).
      • ITU709: (800%) Gamma curve for checking scenes recorded using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
      • S-Log2 [S-Log2] gamma curve. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 32%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. The maximum value of video output is 106%.
      • S-Log3: [S-Log3] gamma curve with characteristics closer to those of film. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. It allows for better reproduction of gradations in shadows and the mid-tone range than S-Log2. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 41%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. As a characteristic of S-Log3, the dynamic range can be extended above 1,300%. However, Picture Profile is set to a dynamic range of 1,300% in order to maintain a balance with camera performance. Under these conditions, the maximum value of video output is 94%.
    Color Mode:
      • Movie Color tones for [Movie] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for movies when Picture Profile is not used)
      • Still Color tones for [Still] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for still images when Picture Profile is not used)
      • Cinema Color tones for [Cine1] and [Cine2] gamma curve
      • Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
      • ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
      • Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white
        S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
      • S-Gamut3.Cine Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
      • This setting is easier to use than [S-Gamut3], because it limits the color space to a more practical range than that of [S-Gamut3]. It is recommended in cases where [S-Gamut3], a wide color space, is not required.
      • S-Gammut3 Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
        This setting has a wider color space than that of [S-Gamut3.Cine]. It is suited for converting images to a format with a wide color space like BT.2020.
        Depending on the type of camera, the entire [S-Gamut3] color space may not be supported.
    Black Level:

    This function adjusts the black level of the image -15 to +15.  As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression.

    Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image, while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.

    If you want to simulate an old film, or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black. When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies.

    This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    Black Gamma:

    This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas. Range available between Wide, Middle or Narrow. Leven between -7 and +7.

    [Range] controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The [Narrow] setting keeps the range close to black, while the [Wide] setting extends the range to gray. [Range] should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you want to adjust the overall image tone, [Range] should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the [Narrow] setting.

    Increasing the [Level] value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set [Range] to [Narrow] and decrease the [Level] value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.

    Knee:

    This function sets the knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your Sony A6500.

    First, select whether to set the knee point and slope automatically or manually in [Mode], and then adjust each setting.

    • Knee > Mode: Auto / Manual
    • Knee > Auto Set > Max Point: 90% to 100%
    • Knee > Auto Set > Sensitivity: High / Mid / Low
    • Knee > Manual Set > Point: 75% to 105%
    • Knee > Manual Set > Slope: –5 to +5
    Mode:
    Auto:
    Automatically adjusts the knee based on what is selected in the following settings (when [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma]).

    • [Max Point] determines the maximum knee point level (white level). The knee slope is automatically adjusted according to the Max Point setting. The standard is to keep it at 100%. A lower setting will turn white grayish, while a higher setting will discard gradations in high luminance areas.
    • [Sensitivity] changes the luminance level at which the knee’s automatic adjustment starts. When set to [High], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at lower input signal levels than normal. When set to [Low], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at higher input signal levels than normal.
    • When a parameter other than [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma], the gamma curve will not exceed the White clip point and over-exposure rarely occurs. When [Mode] is set to [Auto] with these settings, the Knee function is disabled. If you want to enable the Knee function, set [Mode] to [Manual].
    Manual:
    Sticks to settings based on the following selections.

    • [Point] sets the position of the knee point output level.
    • [Slope] determines the inclination of the knee slope.
      A negative slope setting results in a gentler knee slope angle. This expands the dynamic range, but reduces the ability to produce rich gradations. A positive slope setting makes the knee slope inclination steeper. This shrinks the dynamic range, but bolsters the ability to express gradations. When [Slope] is set to +5, the Knee function is disabled.
    • Set [Point] and [Slope] in [Manual Set] in combination. If you select a higher setting for [Point] and a gentler setting for [Slope], you can obtain video-like sharp highlight effects. If softer film-like highlight effects are desired, select a lower setting for [Point] and a steeper setting for [Slope]. In practical terms, move [Point] and [Slope] up and down in opposite directions while checking the gradations in high luminance areas until you find the ideal settings.
    Saturation

    A positive value results in more vivid colors, while a negative value presents faded colors. Saturation must be adjusted in tandem with contrast. Bright and vivid settings produce video-like images, while dark and vivid settings result in film-like images. The combination of bright and light creates pastel tones, whereas dark and light settings create artistic finishes.

    Color Phase

    As you rotate the color wheel to the left (decreasing the set value) or to the right (increasing the set value), the colors shift along the spectrum from red to yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta and red. Because this affects all colors, it is difficult to make specific adjustments exactly as intended. Use this function when matching coloring closely between different cameras.

    Color Depth

    This function adjusts the luminance for each color phase. The luminance changes more drastically when the selected color is richer (higher saturation). It does not change much at all when the color is achromatic.

    A higher set value lowers luminance while deepening the color. A lower set value increases luminance, making the color look paler.
    This setting does not only enhance the apparent vividness of colors, but also can express deep, dark colors.
    Because each of the 6 colors — R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow) — can be adjusted individually, you can apply this function to just the colors you want to emphasize.

    Emphasizing image edges (Detail)

    This function adjusts how much detail is applied to the subject’s image edges.

    Because settings other than [Level] are quite complex, we recommend you start by adjusting only the [Level] setting first.

    Level

    This function determines the strength of detail image processing to be applied.

    • If you apply too much detail, the subject’s original atmosphere may be undermined, as its translucence may be lost or it may be given an unnatural luster. Excessive detail when shooting shiny leaves, for instance, may result in the leaves looking as if they are made of plastic. It is also advisable to apply detail only modestly when shooting paintings.
    • Because Detail makes image edges wider, the original texture of a subject consisting of very fine lines may be lost if too much detail processing is applied. (Example: thin lace curtains)
    • Also, be aware that Detail may fatten up the edges of noise particles that appear under a high gain setting, and may make such particles highly noticeable. In such cases, you can adjust the amount of detail processing on the noise particles by using the [Crispening] function.
    • The image edges become more visible when viewed on large screens. It may be advisable to ease off on Detail if you plan to view the image on large TVs or screens.

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 12

    red camera icon page 12
    Color, White Balance and Image processing settings page 2
    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)

    MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 13

    red camera icon page 13
    Focus assist settings
    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the Sony A6500 to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    AF in Focus Mag.

    You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

    1. Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.
    2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
    3. Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.
    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Peaking Level
              • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your Sony A6500 set to MF or DMF.
              • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
            • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    (MENU – Red Camera Icon – page 13)

    red camera icon page 14
    Face Detection and shoot assist settings
    Smile/Face Detect

    This is another powerful feature. It can be set to detect automatically and focus on (registered) faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the Sony A6500 will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool, along with the pivoting screen.

    Face Registration

    If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

    1. MENU – (Camera Settings1) – [Face Registration] – [New Registration].
    2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    3. When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony 6500 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon – page 1

    purple camera icon page 1
    Movie settings page 1
    Movie/S&Q Motion

    You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting or slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    File Format (video)

    You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S HD, AVCHD or MP4. AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4.  You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

    • XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    • MP4: Records MP4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets, web uploads, and email attachments. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, recording will stop automatically.
    Record Setting  (video):

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

    • 30p/25p: 30p 60M/25p 60Mbps or 30p 100M/25p 100Mbps.
    • 24p: 24p 60Mbps or 24p 100Mbps if your camera is set to NTSC

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

    • 120p/100p: 120p 60M/100p 60Mbps or 120p 100M/100p 100Mbps.
    • 30p/25p: 60p 50Mbps/50p 50Mbps.
    • 60p/50p: 30p 50Mbps/25p 50Mbps.
    • 24p: 24p 50Mbps when set to NTSC.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

    • 60i/50i: 60i 17Mbps(FH)/50i 17Mbps(FH) or 60i 24Mbps(FX)/50i 24Mbps(FX).
    • 60p/50p: 60p 28Mbps(PS)/50p 28Mbps(PS).
    • 24p/25p: 24p 17Mbps(FH)/25p 17Mbps(FH) or 24p 24Mbps(FX)/25p 24Mbps(FX).

    When File Format is set to MP4 you have these options:

    • 60p/50p: 1920×1080 60p 28Mbps/1920×1080 50p 28Mbps.
    • 30p/25p: 1280×720 30p 6Mbps/1280×720 25p 6Mbps or 1920×1080 30p 16Mbps/1920×1080 25p 16Mbps.
    S&Q settings

    You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

    How to record slow motion movie on the Sony A6500:

    1. Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
    2. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[Movie/S&Q Motion]- and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
    3. Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
    4. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

    Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

    Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

    Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [Frame Rate].

    Dual Video REC

    Allows you to simultaneously record an XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie. You can simultaneously record a movie in different movie formats onto a memory card. To set the recording mode for 2 memory cards, such as simultaneous recording or sort recording, use Recording Mode.

    AF Drive Speed

    You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

    • Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
    • Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
    • Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.

    MENU –Purple Camera Icon– page 2

    purple camera icon page 2
    Movie settings page 2
    AF Track Sens (movie)

    You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

    • Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
    • Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
    • Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
    Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

    • On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
    • Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut.. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

    Audio Rec Level

    You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

    Don’t see the audio level display?

    • Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
    • Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.
    • During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.
    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    MENU -Purple Camera Icon- page 3

    purple camera icon page 3
    Movie settings page 3
    Marker Display (movie)

    Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie modeThe markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

    Marker Settings (movie)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. [Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 4

    purple camera icon page 4
    Shutter and Steadyshot settings
    Silent Shooting

    You can shoot images without the shutter sound, i.e. only using the electronic shutter.

    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    This shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Release without lens

    Makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the Sony A6500. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)

    Release without card

    If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

    SteadyShot

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (sensor stabilization) function.For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

    SteadyShot Settings

    If your lens does not relay focal length information to the A6500 body, you can still use the Ibis stabilization by dialing in the focal length manually.

    • Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
    • Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 5

    purple camera icon page 5
    zoom settings
    Zoom

    Turn the digital zoom functionality on or off.

    Zoom settings

    Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens

    Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image):

    Digital zoom:

    Pictures captured by the image sensor of the Sony A6500 are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

    Clear Image Zoom:

    Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the Sony A6500 uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.

    Zoom ring rotate

    Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 6

    purple camera icon page 6
    Display and Auto Review settings
    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Finder Frame Rate

    Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

    • 120fps/100fps: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
    • 60fps/50fps: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
    Zebra

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

    Grid Line (stills)

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    • Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
    • Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
    • Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
    • Off: Does not display the grid line.
    Exposure set guide

    The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 7

    purple camera icon page 7
    Display and Auto Review settings page 2
    Live view Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.

    Auto Review

    You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting.  You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 8

    purple camera icon page 8
    Custom operation settings page 1
    Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, if you assign [Eye AF] to [Center Button] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)], you can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the center of the multi-selector while shooting.

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and [Custom Key(PB)].

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
    • Custom Button 3
    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    Dial Setup

    You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

    Dial Ev Comp

    You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

    MOVIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.

    • Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
    • Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie/S&Q Motion] mode.

    MENU – Purple Camera Icon- page 9

    purple camera icon page 9
    Custom operation settings page 2
    Dial Lock

    You can set whether the dials will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

    • Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
    • Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
    Audio Signals

    Selects whether the product produces a sound or not, for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 1

    wireless icon page 1
    Wireless settings page 1
    Send To Smartphone
      • You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
      • You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony A6500 or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
      • You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A6500 screen.
      • It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
      • You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
    • When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the Sony A6500 using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your Sony A6500 through your home wireless network.

    One Touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.

    I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC), but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    Wi-Fi Settings:
    WPS Push

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Disp MAC Address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-A6500.

    SSID/PW Reset

    Your Sony A6500 shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 2

    wireless icon page 2
    Wireless settings page 2
    Bluetooth Settings.

    Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the Sony A6500 and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

    Loc. Info. Link Set

    You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    To use the location information linking function of the Sony A6500, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

    Procedure:

    1. Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
    2. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Bluetooth Function] – [On].
    3. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Pairing].
    4. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
    5. Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
    6. Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
    7. On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] – [Location Info. Link] – [On].

    (obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

    Options in this Menu:

    • Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
    • Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony A6500 using information from a linked smartphone.
    • Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6500 is yours in particular situations.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – Application List Menu

    Playmemories Icon
    Playmemories application settings

    You’ll find The Smart remote control camera app (which allows you to use your phone as a remote control via PlayMemories phone app for iPhone and Android) and the Playmemories Camera app here.

    You can access your online PlayMemories account here, or create an account (once you’ve set up your Sony A6500 connection with your Wifi network).

    You’ll also be able to download new apps available for purchase in the Sony Playmemories online app store like the Time-lapse and smooth reflection app.

    If you do not want to connect your camera to the internet, you can always install new apps (and updates) if you connect the Sony A6500 to your Mac or PC with the supplied USB cable, using the Sony PlayMemories desktop application.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    playback icon page 1
    Playback settings page 1
    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD card.

    View Mode

    select how the Sony A6500 will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the Sony A6500 or not.

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the Sony A6500 to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    playback icon page 2
    Playback settings page 2
    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Protect

    Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    Photo Capture

    Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    setup icon page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Gamma Disp. Assist

    Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    MENU – Setup – page 2

    setup icon page 2

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a linear tab style menu layout.

    Mode Dial Guide

    Turn the description for each shooting mode ON or OFF. Can be handy at first for a novice user to get familiar with what the different shooting modes do.

    Delete Confirm

    When deleting images on your SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion (to make sure you don’t accidentally delete anything). You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality from standard to high at the expense of shorter battery life.

    Pwr Save Start time

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

    Auto Pwr OFF Temp. 

    Sets the temperature of the camera at which the Sony A6500 turns off automatically during shooting (overheating). When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    setup icon page 3

    NTSC/PAL Selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.

    Cleaning Mode

    If dust or debris gets inside the Sony A6500 and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

    Touch Operation

    Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touch pad operations.”

    • Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
    • Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
    • Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    • Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
    Touch Pad Area Set.

    Sets the area to be used for touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. You can prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

    • Whole Screen: Uses the entire monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/2 Area: Uses only the right half of the monitor as the touchpad.
    • Right 1/4 Area: Uses only the right quarter of the monitor as the touchpad.
    Demo Mode

    The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony A6500 has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select Off.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    setup icon page 4

    TC/UB settings

    Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

    • TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    • TC Preset: Sets the time code.
    • UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
    • TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
    • TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    • TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    • UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
    Remote CTRL

    You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2 SEC button (2-second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.

    HDMI Settings

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
    4K Output Sel.

    Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    • Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the Sony A6500 memory card.
    • HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your Sony A6500 to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer
    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

    Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony A6500 might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    MENU – Setup – page 5

    setup icon page 5

    USB Power Supply

    You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

    PC Remote settings

    Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A6500 for the first time.

    Area Settings

    Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.

    Copyright info

    Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

    MENU – Setup – page 6

    setup icon page 6

    Format

    When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony A6500 for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

    File Number

    Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

    Set File Name

    Use the standard file naming system or a customizable one.

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the Sony A6500 will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    MENU – Setup – page 7

    setup icon page 7

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the Sony A6500 to factory settings.

    The Next Chapter is about the various shooting Modes Available, another concept that is necessary to understand fully.

    Shooting modes available via the Mode Dial 

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.

    These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.

    The Sony A6500 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).

    Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button.

    Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).

    P (Program Auto):

    Program (P) mode automatically adjusts exposure and aperture according to your desired setting.

    See this as a more advanced iAuto mode, as you’ll be able to change all other settings through the touch screen (Focus area, creative style, exposure compensation,…);

    tip: lower the automatic ISO range to 100-1600 for better image quality (ISO-Auto range in MENU SYSTEM)

    A (Aperture Priority):

    Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot, for example when you want to blur the background (large aperture like f/1.8), or want a sharp corner-to-corner image (around f/5.6-f/8).

    The aperture value can be changed during movie recording, a technique that will be familiar to videographers.

    Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred (what is called Bokeh).

    Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.

    If proper exposure cannot be set, the shutter speed on the shooting screen blinks.

    S (Shutter Priority):

    The go-to mode if you can’t shoot fast-moving subjects, by manually adjusting the shutter speed. You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by changing the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of motion with a high-speed shutter, or as a trailing image with a low-speed shutter. The shutter speed can be changed while recording movies. The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

    If a correct exposure cannot be obtained, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks.

              • Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.
              • The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.
              • When the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer, noise reduction will be applied (Long Exposure noise reduction in the Menu ON/OFF) after shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open. This will temporarily freeze your Sony A6500, and you want to be able to capture images while noise reduction is in progress.
            • The brightness of the picture on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot (there is no Live view on Sony cameras for long exposures).

    M (Manual Exposure):

    Both shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed in this mode, also during movie recording.

    Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed or aperture value, then turn the control wheel to select a value.

    When ISO Auto is used, the ISO value automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.

              • If the aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not suitable for adequate exposure, the ISO value indicator will blink.
              • When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
              • The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
            • The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot.
    Bulb Mode in Manual exposure

    Bulb is the mode used to shoot a trailing picture of a subject’s’ movement with a long exposure time. Think light trails from cars, or fireworks.

              1. Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).
              1. Turn the control wheel counterclockwise until [BULB] is indicated.
              1. Set the aperture value (F-value) by turning the control dial.
              1. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
            1. Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.

    Tips:

              • Use a tripod for long exposures.
              • Use the PlayMemories remote or a wired remote control to eliminate any movement of the camera.
            • After shooting, noise reduction will be applied (as noise builds up quickly with long exposures). This will take as long as your long exposure did, and you won’t be able to use the Sony A6500 until this is finished.

    Can’t get the shutter speed to Bulb Mode? Check these settings and turn them OFF:

              • Is Smile Shutter activated?
              • Is Auto HDR enabled?
              • Is Picture Effect is set to HDR Painting or Rich-tone Mono?
            • Is Drive Mode set to Cont. Shooting, Cont. Bracket or Self-timer(Cont)?

    Movie:

    Although you can capture movies in any mode, it is easiest to change all related settings for video recording here. You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.

    Press the MOVIE button to start recording and again to stop recording.

    Menu:

              • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) adjusted automatically. Other settings can be set manually, and the settings are retained.
              • Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
              • Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
            • Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

    When a zoom lens is mounted, you can also zoom by operating that lens. When a motor zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.

    Sweep Panorama:

    Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the footage.

              • Panorama mode will capture a series of images in succession.
              • You’ll be guided through this process using an arrow on-screen that shows the direction and speed of the camera panning.
              • The 6500 will automatically detect and capture the series of images while panning.
            • Afterward, it will stitch together all these pictures into a broad view of the scenery and save it as a Jpeg.

    TIP: Panorama size (standard or wide) and panning direction can be changed in the MENU–.

    Scene Selection Mode (SCN)

    Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. iAuto and Superior Auto detect these scenes automatically for you and applies the presets it deems best, and does an excellent job at that. However, in certain circumstances (when you know what you are going to capture) it is better to select the appropriate scene yourself, as it takes the guessing work out of the equation.

    The Sony A6500 has a decent range of well-designed presets:

    Portrait:

    Blurred background for a beautiful Bokeh, and sharpens the subject. How good this will look relies heavily on the lens you’re using. A zoom is less suited to this kind of photography; best use a prime, fast lens.

    This preset accentuates the skin tones softly (you can select skin softening for all Modes in the Menu system too).

    Sports Action:

    Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

    Macro:

    Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.

    Landscape:

    Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors. The Sony A6500 will go to a smaller aperture to achieve this, as lenses are sharper corner-to-corner at smaller apertures.

    Sunset:

    Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.

    Night Scene:

    Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere. Will go to higher ISO values and larger apertures to achieve a useable shutter speed, enabling you to capture sharp images without blur. 

    Hand-held Twilight:

    Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.

    Night Portrait:

    Shoots night scene portraits using the flash. The flash does not pop up automatically. Pop up the flash manually before shooting.

    Anti Motion Blur:

    Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.

    Eye AF

    You’ll need to assign this function to a button for it to work.

    MENU – purple camera icon- page 8 – Custom Key Settings – assign the Eye AF function to the desired button.

    The Eye AF feature will let the camera focus on the subject’s eyes while you keep the button pressed.

            1. Point the Sony A6500 at a face, and push the button to which you have assigned the Eye AF
            2. Press the shutter button while pressing the button

    The Sony A6500 may not be able to focus on the eyes depending on the circumstances, like when no

    Eyes can be detected within the autofocus area. In such cases, the camera focuses on the face.

    You cannot use Eye AF when the focus mode is set to C, set it to A.

    When the Sony A6500 focuses on the eyes and Smile/Face Detect is on, you’ll see a detection frame.

    Displayed on the face after it is shown on the eyes. When Smile/Face Detect is off, a detection frame is affixed to the eyes.

    Auto Obj. Framing (not available in RAW)

    Menu – Red camera icon- page 13-  Auto Obj. Framing – desired setting (On or Off)

    When the A6500 detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are tracked by Lock-on AF, the Sony A6500 automatically trims the image into an appropriate composition and saves it.

    Live View Display

    MENU – purple camera icon – page 7 – Live View Display – desired setting

    Live view shows your images as they’ll appear out of the camera, with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect on the screen.

            1. Setting Effect ON (default setting and Intelligent Auto, Superior Auto, Sweep Panorama, Movie or Scene Selection): Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen. Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in Manual Exposure mode.
            2. Setting Effect OFF: Shows Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect. This is useful for precisely checking your composition in particular conditions. Like when you use a third-party Flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings.

    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    MENU – purple camera icon – page 4 – e-Front Curtain Shut – desired setting ON or OFF

     Yes the Sony A6500 has an electronic front curtain shutter! This shortens the time lag between shutter releases.

    Remember that when you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.

    When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, turn this function off. If you set this function to On, the correct exposure will not be set, or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Lens compensation features

    The Sony A6500 has a range of built-in lens compensation functions. I can see this being useful for journalism and sports shooters who want to quickly get their jpegs to their editors with the minimum amount of editing.

    Shading Comp.

    MENU – Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Shading Comp – desired setting ( Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen caused by certain lenses.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Chromatic Aberration Compensation

    MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp –  Chro. Aber. Comp  – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Reduces the colour deviation at the corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Distortion Compensation

    MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Distortion Comp – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the distortion of the screen, caused by particular lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses and with some cannot be turned Off.

    Memory card issues

    Some people have reported problems with certain memory cards. These problems include:

            • Unable to magnify images on the card.
            • Buffer related problems.
            • Inability to read the memory card.

    SD, SDHC, SDXC memory card and Memory Stick PRO Duo, Pro-HG Duo, PRO-HG HX Duo media are all supported.

    Make sure you:

            • Format the memory card once you’ve inserted in the camera.
            • If you’re using fast burst speeds, use a fast card (32GB 95MB/s read and 45mB/s) write is my recommendation to take advantage of the Sony A6500 FR and Buffer.
            • If you’re using larger cards (64 or 138GB), make sure you get the fastest available.
            • An SDHC UHS-I card (stands for “Ultra High Speed”) is recommended for best performance in burst mode.
            • Sandisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I cards seem to work very well.

    Conclusion

    Here it is, the advanced manual for the Sony A6500 with plenty of tips and tricks to get you started. If you’re somewhat overwhelmed by this large post, I would suggest that you use the search function in a browser like Chrome at first to find the subject you are actually looking for. If you have any questions or need extra information on any subject covered here, feel free to write something in the comments section below. Have Fun!

  • Sony DSC-HX400V settings, tips and tricks

    Sony DSC-HX400V settings, tips and tricks

    Introduction

    This is an advanced manual for the SONY HX400V with tips and tricks. I’ll be going through the entire menu system with you and explain you exactly what is what, giving you tips on how to setup your camera along the way. The Sony H400V has little in common with the older HX300, so you’ll see lots of differences in the menu if you come from that camera. Although the basic features did not change (a 1 2/3 BSI CMOS sensor with 20 million pixels and  a 50x zoom ranging from 24-1200 mm), several defects have been corrected  like a more powerful new Bionz X processor, slightly redesigned optical formula, Wi-Fi and NFC, a new user interface like the Sony RX100 and an accessory hot shoe.

    Sony DSC-HX400V settings, tips and tricks

    This new menu system might look confusing at first, but you’ll quickly get the hang of it if you spend some time reading this Sony HX400V guide. The Sony manual does offer insights on this, but to be honest, it does not give you a page by page explanation as I do. So sit back, read carefully and get ready to learn. If there is a feature that you don’t want to tweak or learn, just skip it and move to the next chapter.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your camera, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 1)

    Menu camera icon page 1

    Image size:

    The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is saved. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded. Much depend upon the intended use for your images, but if you can spare the extra expense of a larger SD card, I would recommend you to set the image size to large.

    Knowing the size in pixels at different aspect ratios and quality levels can tell you how large you can print. An A3 print is 3508 pixels x 4961 pixels, so you can comfortably print your images on an A3 paper if you set the Image size to Large. Setting image size to medium would correspond to your image filling on a full-screen 4Kmonitor.

    The of your image in pixels when Aspect Ratio is 3:2:

    • L: 18M 5184×3456 pixels
    • M: 8.9M 3648×2432 pixels
    • S:: 4.5M 2592×1728 pixels

    The size of your image in pixels when Aspect Ratio is 4:3: (RECOMMENDED):

    • L: 20M 5184×3888 pixels
    • M: 10M 3648×2736 pixels
    • S: 5.0M 2592×1944 pixels
    • VGA 640×480 pixels

    The size of your image in pixels when Aspect Ratio is 16:9:

    • L: 115M 5184×2920 pixels
    • M: 7.5M 3648×2056 pixels
    • S: 2.1M 1920×1080 pixels

    The size of your image in pixels when Aspect Ratio is 1:1:

    • L: 15M 3888×3888 pixels
    • M: 7.5M 2736×2736 pixels
    • S: 3.7M 1920×1920 pixels
    Aspect Ratio

    You can choose 4:3 (which uses the full sensor surface), 3:2, 1:1 or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Unless you are not interested in editing your images later, leave as is at 4:3, you can always crop in a photo editor. Remember that if you decide to use a different aspect ratio, what is cropped out will not be saved.

    Quality:

    The HX400V is not capable of storing RAW images. RAW basically means that all the information captured by the camera’s sensor is saved unprocessed.

    Instead, this camera saves it as a JPEG file. This Jpeg will have gone through all your settings like added sharpness, noise reduction, white balance, etc as well as being compressed to a certain degree.
    You have two compression options available: FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward.

    I always recommend setting Quality to Fine. When you’re investing in a good camera like this, you don’t want to miss out on the fantastic detail in can produce.

    Panorama size

    (Only available when in panorama shooting mode on the mode dial) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    You can make panoramas while scanning your camera up-down or left-right.So what is this all about?  This might sound confusing at first, but this comes down to how you hold the Sony DSC-HX400V when shooting panoramas: either in portrait or landscape orientation.

    Sony DSC-HX400V

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 2)

    Menu camera icon page 2

    File format (for movies)

    Selects the movie file format.

    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    • MP4: Records mp4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets, web uploads, email attachments, etc. Audio: AAC.
    Record setting (also a movie setting)

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. You can change the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bitrate, the higher the image quality. If you’re not familiar with this, leave as is.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD:

    • 60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 fields/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in interlaced mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.

    When  File Format is set to MP4:

    • Movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60icompatible devices), approximately 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or approximately 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with AAC audio, MP4 format.

    Menu items details: Settings also depend on your isterion setting PAL/NTSC

    When File Format is set to AVCHD:

    • 60i/50i 24M(FX): 50i 24M(FX: Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
    • 60i/50i 17M(FH) (default setting)*: 50i 17M(FH) (default setting): Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)
    • 60p/50p 28M(PS): Records the highest image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Max.)
    • 50p 28M(PS): Records the highest image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Max.)
    • 24p/25p 24M(FX): 25p 24M(FX)**: Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
    • 24p/25p 17M(FH): 25p 17M(FH)**: Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)

    When File Format is set to MP4:

    • 1440×1080 12M (default setting): Records movies of 1440 × 1080. Bit-rate: Approx. 12 Mbps (Avg.)
    • VGA 3M: Records movies of VGA size. Bit-rate: Average 3 Mbps.

    General notes:

    • 60p/50p movies can be played back only on compatible devices.
    • Movies recorded with the [60p 28M(PS)]/[50p 28M(PS)]/[60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)]/ [24p 24M(FX)] /[25p 24M(FX)] setting in [ Record Setting] are converted by PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording disc. This conversion can take a long time. Also, you cannot create a disc in the original image quality. If you want to keep the original image quality, store your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.
    • To play back60p/50p/24p/25p movies on a TV, the TV must be compatible with those formats. If the TV is not compatible with the 24p/25p format, 24p/25p movies will be output as 60i/50i movies.
    Drive Mode

    You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.

    • Single Shooting (default setting): Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button. Hi: takes about ten images per second, Lo about three.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image after 10 or 2 seconds. (selectable in sub menu) You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.
    • Self-Portrait: When the HX400V detects the number of faces you have selected, a beep will sound and the shooting starts after two seconds.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a specified number of images continuously after 10, 5 or seconds or 2 seconds (selectable in the sub menu).
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness. (3 images between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu.) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with a different color tone according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and the color filter.  (3 images with either LO small changes or Hi large changes)
    Flash Mode
    Flash off;

    obvious

    Autoflash:

    The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards a bright light.

    Fill-flash:

    The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.

    Slow sync:

    Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode actual does is first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.

    Advanced Flash:

    The flash automatically operates in dark locations or when there is backlighting. In dark locations, the upper limit value of the ISO sensitivity increases in order to maximize the flash range.

    Rear Sync:

    Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’

    Wireless:

    When using a wireless flash, the shading effect provides a more 3D appearance to a subject than when using an attached flash. This mode is effective when you attach a remote control-compatible external flash sold separately to the camera, and shoot with a wireless flash, placed away from the product. If you’re looking for a suitable flash, you’ll need one that corresponds to the Sony MIS (multi-interface shoe). If you want to save some money, have a look at brands like Godox or Neewer.

    Sony DSC-HX400V

    Flash compensation:

    Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –2.0 EV to +2.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image.

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using the flash.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 3)

    Menu camera icon page 3

    Focus area

    You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘wide’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    Wide:

    Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.

    Center:

    Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.

    Flexible spot:

    Flexible spot area selects a spot anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center)  You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when set to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)

    Focus Lock:

    Shoots images with the focus locked on the desired subject in auto focus mode.

    1. Set the zoom/focus switch to AF/ZOOM.
    2. Place the subject within the AF area and press the shutter button halfway down. The focus is locked.
    3. Keep pressing the shutter button halfway down, and place the subject back in the original position to re-compose the shot.
    4. Press the shutter button down fully to take the picture.
    AF Illuminator:

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the camera to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on.

    Exposure Comp

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 2 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the AutoISO range
    I have this range set between 80-800 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 1600. When shooting in low light, you might think of using a higher top value (factory setting goes up to 3200).

    Tip: Autofocus will also work better at higher ISO.

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.
    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.
    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    If you like dark or moody portraits, try setting Metering Mode to Spot or Center, and make sure your subjects face is centrally positioned in the frame. You’ll see that the exposure will be more suitable for the face than when set to Multi.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 4)

    Menu camera icon page 4

    White Balance

    You can either:

    • Auto (default setting): The product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
    • Daylight: The color tones are adjusted for the daylight. Shade: The color tones are adjusted for shadiness.
    • Cloudy: The color temperature is adjusted for a cloudy sky. Incandescent: The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or under bright lightings, such as in a photo studio.
    • Incandescent: The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or under bright lights, such as in a photo studio.
    • Fluor.: Cool White: The color temperature is adjusted for white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Day White: The color temperature is adjusted for neutral white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Daylight: The color temperature is adjusted for daylight fluorescent lighting.
    • Flash: The color temperature is adjusted for a flash.
    • C.Temp./Filter: Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography.
    • Custom: Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].
    • Custom Setup: Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    • D-Range Optimizer: Auto (default setting): Corrects the brightness automatically.
    • D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5: Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong)
    Auto HDR:

    This feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the over exposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto (default setting): Corrects the exposure difference automatically. Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ―
    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV: Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimal level between 1.0 EV (weak) and 6.0 EV (strong). For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed of the following exposure levels; −1.0 EV, optimal exposure, and +1.0 EV
    Creative Style

    This menu setting allows you to select the desired image processing. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with [Creative Style], unlike with [Scene Selection] where the product adjusts the exposure.

    • Standard (default setting): For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Portrait: For shooting the skin color in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more.
    • Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

    Contrast, Saturation, and Sharpness can be adjusted for each Creative Style item. Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW). You can perform detailed settings for some of the effects by using the left/right side of the control wheel.

    • Off (default setting): Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Soft Focus: Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
    • HDR Painting: Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    • Miniature: Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature models.
    • Watercolor: Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
    • Illustration: Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.
    Focus Magnifier

    Another quite handy feature if you want to check if your image is in focus. It means that you can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting. Great for shooting in manual focus or DMF. You can also set how long the magnified image will be shown in the Focus Magnif. Time setting. (custom settings).

    Press on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position you want to enlarge using up/down/left/right side of the control wheel. You can change the magnifier scaling in two steps by pressing in the center, and close the focus magnifier mode and return to the normal shooting display by pressing three times

    You can change the magnifier scaling in two steps by pressing in the center, and close the focus magnifier mode and return to the normal shooting display by pressing three times.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 5)

    Menu camera icon page 5

    If you’ve stumbled on my guide trying to find where to turn on Long Exposure noise reduction, I’ll have to disappoint you. Although one on the most requested features, the DSC-HQ90V does not have this functionality.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would chance it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values)

    Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the camera is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    Smile/Face Detect

    This is another powerful feature. It can be set to automatically detect on focus on faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the camera will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool.

    Sony DSC-HX400V
    Soft skin effect

    Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function. I don’t like the results, so on my camera, it is turned off.

    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony HX400V will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. A nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    Scene Selection

    Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.

    HX400V mode dial

    1. Set the mode dial to SCN (Scene Selection).
    2. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Scene Selection SCN] → desired mode. When [Mode Dial Guide] is set to [On], you can select the desired settings after you have changed the position of the mode dial.

    These presets are available:

    • Portrait: Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
    • Adv.Sports Shooting: Allows you to shoot subjects with fast movements, such as sports. While the shutter is pressed halfway, the movement of the subject is predicted and the focus will be adjusted.
    • Landscape: Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
    • Night Scene: Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
    • Hand-held Twilight: Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.
    • Night Portrait: Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
    • Anti Motion Blur: Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
    • Pet: Allows you to shoot images of your pet with the best settings.
    • Gourmet: Allows you to shoot food arrangements in delicious and bright colors.
    • Beach: Allows you to shoot scenes on the beach in bright and vivid colors even under the sunlight.
    • Snow: Allows you to shoot clear images, preventing sunken colors in snowy scenes or other places where the whole screen appears white.
    • Fireworks: Allows you to shoot images of fireworks in all their splendor.
    • Soft Skin: Allows you to shoot images of faces with a smoother look.
    • High Sensitivity: Allows you to shoot still images even in dark locations without using the flash, and reduces subject blur. Also allows you to shoot dark movie scenes more brightly.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 6)

    Menu camera icon page 6

    Movie

    You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.

    • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually
    SteadyShot (for movies)

    Sets SteadyShot when shooting movies.

    Here you have three options:

    • Intelligent Active: Provides the most powerful SteadyShot effect. I set it to this.
    • Active (default setting): Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
    • Standard: Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting condition.
    Auto slow shut. (also a movie setting)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark. Less light always means a longer shutter time in order to get a correct exposure. As when shooting stills, you might get some blur when you use this feature.

    On: The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in the dark.

    Off: The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

    Micref Level

    You can select the microphone level for movie recording to Normal (for dialogue) or Low (for concerts etc).

    Wind noise reduct.

    Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise during movie recording.

    Shooting tip list

    This setting basically turns the on-screen shooting tips on or off. If you’re not fully comfortable with the camera, this is an excellent tool in order to get acquainted with all the functions and settings. Once it starts getting on your nerves, it means you know enough to turn it off :).

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 7)

    Menu camera icon page 7

    Memory

    Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings in the product. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

    Items that can be registered:

    • Shooting mode
    • Aperture (F number)
    • Shutter speed
    • Camera Settings
    • Optical zoom scale

    To recall registered settings: Set the mode dial to MR, then press the right/left side of the control wheel or turn the control wheel to select the desired memory number.

    To change registered settings: Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 1)

    Menu Wheel icon page 1

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier on Page 5 of the camera settings. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit.

    Two seconds is how I have it set up.

    Grid Line

    Having a grid line on your screen is a helpful aide for the composition of your image.
    The human brain is hard-wired to recognize the structure, and most people find a well-composed image more eye-pleasing.
    During photography history, rules have been developed on how to compose the different elements best within a scene. Many landscapes you’ll see have the horizon run through the middle of the image for instance, but this is just composition in its simplest form. Many photographers with a thorough understanding of these techniques go far beyond that.
    A good starting point is using the in-camera grid to make your brain aware of the possibilities in composition.
    The Rules of 3rds, Square and Diag +square are available in the Sony HX400V.

    Auto Review

    Select the amount of time the camera displays your image directly after capturing the image. 10, 5 and 2 sec is available, or you can turn this feature OFF if it annoys you.

    Peaking Level
    • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.
    • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies; you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
    • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 2

    Menu Wheel icon page 2

    Exposure set guide

    Sets the guide displayed when exposure settings are changed in the shooting screen.  Excellent tool when you’re getting to know the functionality of your new camera. If you’re familiar with Sony’s feature, turn it OFF.

    Zoom setting

    Set to Optical zoom only, using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens. If you set this to digital zoom, the camera will be basically cropping pixels out.

    Finder/Monitor

    Sets the method for switching the display between Electronic Viewfinder and the screen.

    • Auto (default setting): When you look into the Electronic Viewfinder, the display is switched to the Electronic Viewfinder automatically.
    • Viewfinder: Switch between the Electronic Viewfinder display and the screen display by pushing up/down the pop-up finder. When the Electronic Viewfinder is pushed down, the image is displayed only on the screen. When the Electronic Viewfinder is pushed up, the screen is turned off and the image is displayed only in the Electronic Viewfinder.
    Write Date

    Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image. Remember that you won’t be able to delete the date stamp on your image if it is turned On.

    Function menu set

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    Custom keys setting

    Assigning functions to the various keys allows you to speed up operations by pressing the appropriate key when the shooting information screen is displayed.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 3

    Menu Wheel icon page 3 (custom settings)

    Movie button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE button.

    • Always (default setting): Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
    • Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to Movie mode.
    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 1

    Wireless functionality - page 1

    Send To Smartphone
    • You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
    • You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or on the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
    • You’ll have to connect the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the Sony DSC-HX400V screen.
    • It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
    • You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
    • When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to physically connect the computer to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can view images and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

    One Touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.

    I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC) but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    WPS Push

    If your access point has the WPS button, you can register the access point to the camera easily by pushing the WPS button.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 2

    Wireless functionality - page 2

    Access Point Set

    Here you can setup an access point for your camera to the internet.

    It enables the Sony DSC-HX400V to install PlayMemories apps from the internet directly. Works just like setting an access point (WiFi connection) on your phone.

    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6000 is yours in certain situations.

    Disp MAC. address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony DSC-HX400V.

    SSID/PW reset

    The Sony DSC-HX400V shares the connection information for Send to Smartphone and Smart Remote Embedded with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all the network settings to default settings.

    MENU – Playmemories settings- page 1

    playmemories menu

    Application List

    You’ll find The Smart remote control camera app (wich allows you to use your phone as a remote control via PlayMemories phone app for iPhone and Android) and the Playmemories Camera app here.

    You can access your online PlayMemories account here, or create an account (once you’ve set up your camera connection with your Wifi network).

    playmemories apps

    You’ll also be able to download new apps available for purchase in the Sony Playmemories online app store like the Time-lapse and smooth reflection app.

    If you do not want to connect your camera to the internet, you can always install new apps (and updates) if you connect the camera to your Mac or PC with the supplied USB cable, using the Sony PlayMemories desktop application.

    Introduction

    You’ll find information about the service and available countries and regions here.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    Menu Playback icon page 1

    Delete

    Delete on or multiple images stored on your SD card.

    View Mode

    select how the camera will arrange captured images in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Select whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

     Sony DSC-HX400V
    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and enlarge a portion of that image. Useful for checking details and focus.

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    Menu Playback icon page 2

    4K Still Image PB

    Outputs still images in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    Protect

    Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

    Motion Interval ADJ

    Change the interval of the image tracking of the subject’s motion in high-speed, like a stroboscopic image.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    (briefcase) general options - page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Volume settings

    Change the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    Audio Signals

    You can turn off audio signals like the beep when te camera achieves focus. Useful if you want a more stealthy operation (although you’ll still hear the second curtain shutter).

    GPS signals

    You can record the location information with the images when the built-in GPS sensor of this product can acquire the location information. Using the software PlayMemories Home, you can import the images recorded with the location information to a computer and enjoy viewing them on a map which shows their shooting location. Refer to the Help of PlayMemories Home for details.

    • On: The GPS function is activated.
    • Off: The GPS function is turned off. The status icon on the screen may differ depending on the conditions of the signals emitted from the satellites.
    • No icon is displayed: GPS is set to Off or an error has occurred.
    MENU – Setup – page 2

    (briefcase) general options - page 2

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a direct tab style menu layout.

    Mode Dial Guide

    You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change the settings available for that shooting mode. Handy when you are learning how to use the Sony DSC-HX400V.

    Delete confirm

    You can set whether Delete or Cancel is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality. Set to standard to preserve battery life.

    • High: Displays in high quality.
    • Standard: Displays in standard quality.
    Pwr Save Start time

    Selects the time it takes for the camera to go into sleep mode if you don’t use it.

    Demo Mode

    Demo mode is only used in retail stores for demonstration purposes.

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    (briefcase) general options - page 3

    HDMI Resolution

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto (default setting): The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).CTRL for HDMI.
    CTRL for HDMI

    When connecting this product to a BRAVIA compatible TV using an HDMI cable, you can operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.

    Either ON or OFF.

    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto (default setting): Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.
    Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB power supply

    You can charge theSony DSC-HX400V via USB. This setting sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    (briefcase) general options - page 4

    Language

    Set your preferred language. The advantage of setting it to Eglish is that you’ll find much more information online when you need any troubleshooting.

    Date Time Setup

    Change date, time, date format and Daylight savings time.

    Area setting

    Select your region, or change region when abroad, the camera will automatically change time and date for you.

    MENU – Setup – page 5

    (briefcase) general options - page 5

    Format

    Format your SD card before use; this will erase any images still on the memory card.

    File Number

    Number your files according to a number of shots or reset it to start from 1.

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the camera will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for easily organizing events and locations

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to possibly retrieve lost images.

    MENU – Setup – page 6

    (briefcase) general options - page 6

    Display media info

    Displays the recordable time of movies and the number of recordable still images for the inserted memory card.

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and lens are running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

     Setting Reset

    Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

    In the next chapter, I’ll go over all the functionality that I find most useful

    Mode dial functions: what’s the difference between intelligent and superior auto?

    Intelligent Auto

    • This mode lets the camera detect what kind of scene you are photographing. It switches to the scene setting it finds most appropriate, including aperture, shutter speed, ISO, and AF mode.
    • These different scene settings are the same you’ll find manually selectable in SCN mode.
    • All Sony cameras do a good job at detecting scenes, although the advanced photographer will prefer to shoot in Aperture, Shutter priority or fully manual mode in order to have more control over things like depth-of-field, movement, and focusing area.

    Superior Auto

    • Does the same scene recognition and (when the camera decides it is appropriate) adds hand-held twilight, anti-motion blur, and backlight correction HDR in order to optimize dynamic range, movement and exposure.
    • It uses multiple images shot in close succession at high quality and combines them into one jpeg. Works well on stills but should not be used for movement.

    Peaking

    Peaking enhances the outline of in-focus ranges using a specific color in Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus shooting.

    • This works in MF and DMF focusing modes
    • MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Peaking Level] → desired setting.
    • It displays a color selectable noise in the regions where the focus is on.
    • A low setting is recommended in enough light on the Sony DSC-HX400V.
    • In dim light, you might need to go to medium to get a good idea of where the focus is at.

    Lock-on AF

    Depending on the options selected in [Focus Area] or [Center Lock-on AF], the available functions varies when pressing the key. Found in the Focus Area setting. When you press the key when the [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Center] and [Center Lock-on AF] is [On], [Center Lock-on AF] will activate. The camera will automatically focus while pressing the key when the [Focus Area] is [Wide] or [Center], [Focus Mode] is set to other than [Manual Focus], and [Center Lock on AF] is set to [Off].

    • When you press the center button, the camera detects the subject positioned in the center of the screen and continues to track the subject.
    • MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Lock-on AF] → [On]
    • Align the target frame (A) over the subject and press in the center of the control wheel. Press again to stop tracking.
    • If the camera loses track of the subject, it can detect when the subject reappears on the monitor and resume tracking.
    • Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

    Smile/face detect

    When set to On, The Sony DSC-HX400V will automatically detect and focus on faces. This is a very powerful feature.

    Go to MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Smile/Face Detect.] and select either:

    1. On : Automatically selects a face to be brought into focus.
    2. Smile shutter: Automatically detects and shoots a smile. When the Smile/Face Detect. is set to Smile Shutter, you can select the Smile Detection Sensitivity from Slight Smile, Normal Smile or Big Smile.

    Sony DSC-HX400V

    Conclusion

    Although the Sony DSC-HX400V compact camera is deemed an enthusiast oriented or ‘beginner’ camera, you’ll find that it has many of the advanced features of the Sony RX and even ILC line. An advanced manual like this can help you make the most of it, and make you a better photographer. If you’re just starting out in photography, I would suggest taking a look at the SCN or Scene selections that give you a good starting point for any type of activity or subject you’d like to shoot.

    There are many hidden features and functions like this inside the Sony HQ400V, and I would suggest taking some time to learn some of them. I know that and advanced guide like this looks daunting at first, but you’ll soon get the hang of it by easily following along with your camera’s menu system.

  • Sony DSC-HX90V settings, tips and tricks

    Sony DSC-HX90V help guide with tips and tricks

    Introduction

    This is a guide for the Sony HX90V compact camera with tips and tricks. This advanced manual follows the Menu system and is easiest to use when you have your camera next to you so you can follow along page by page. If you are looking for something specific, I would suggest using the search function in a browser like google chrome or Firefox.

    A quick specs overview: The Sony Cyber-shot DSC-HX90V is one of the world’s smallest superzoom cameras. It features a 30X zoom equivalent to 24-720mm, also optical image stabilization, and an excellent 18.2MP BSI CMOS sensor. If you’d think that Sony is cutting corners at this price, it features the same pop-up OLED electronic viewfinder as Sony’s RX100 III along with a 3″ LCD that tilts upward 180 degrees. Another interesting feature inherited from the RX100 is a customizable ring around the front of the lens.

    The HX90V can record video at 1080/60p using the XAVC S codec, which allows for bit rates up to 50MBps. The camera also has built-in Wi-Fi with NFC as well as a GPS.

    Sony DSC-HX90V settings, tips and tricks

    Getting the most out of your HX90V means familiarizing yourself with the features in the Menu structure, and it is also the easiest way to good your camera set-up according to your liking. The Sony manual does offer insights on this, but to be honest, it does not give you a page by page explanation as I do. So sit back, read carefully and get ready to learn. If there is a feature that you don’t want to tweak or learn, just skip it and move to the next chapter.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your camera, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 1)

    Menu camera icon page 1

    Image size:

    The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is saved. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded. Much depend upon the intended use for your images, but if you can spare the extra expense of a larger SD card, I would recommend you to set the image size to large.

    Knowing the size in pixels at different aspect ratios and quality levels can tell you how large you can print. An A3 print is 3508 pixels x 4961 pixels, so you can comfortably print your images on an A3 paper if you set the Image size to Large. Setting image size to medium would correspond to your image filling on a full-screen 4Kmonitor.

    The size of your image in pixels when Aspect Ratio is 4:3 (RECOMMENDED):

    • L: 18M 4896×3672 pixels
    • M: 10M 3648×2736 pixels
    • S: 5.0M 2592×1944 pixels
    • VGA 640×480 pixels

    The size of your image in pixels when Aspect Ratio is 16:9:

    • L: 13M 4896×2752 pixels
    • M: 7.5M 3648×2056 pixels
    • S: 2.1M 1920×1080 pixels

    The size of your image in pixels when Aspect Ratio is 1:1:

    • L: 13M 3664×3664 pixels
    • M: 7.5M 2736×2736 pixels
    • S: 3.7M 1920×1920 pixels
    Aspect Ratio

    You can choose 4:3 (which uses the full sensor surface), 1:1 or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Unless you are not interested in editing your images later, leave as is at 4:3, you can always crop in a photo editor. Remember that if you decide to use a different aspect ratio, what is cropped out will not be saved.

    Quality:

    The HX90V is not capable of storing RAW images. RAW basically means that all the information captured by the camera’s sensor is saved unprocessed.

    Instead, this camera saves it as a JPEG file. This Jpeg will have gone through all your settings like added sharpness, noise reduction, white balance, etc as well as being compressed to a certain degree.
    You have two compression options available: FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward.

    I always recommend setting Quality to Fine. When you’re investing in a good camera like this, you don’t want to miss out on the fantastic detail in can produce.

    Panorama size

    (Only available when in panorama shooting mode on the mode dial) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    You can make panoramas while scanning your camera up-down or left-right.So what is this all about?  This might sound confusing at first, but this comes down to how you hold the Sony DSC-HX90V IV when shooting panoramas: either in portrait or landscape orientation.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 2)

    Menu camera icon page 2

    File format (for movies)

    Selects the movie file format.

    • XAVC S HD: Records high-definition movies in XAVC S HD. This format supports a higher bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    • MP4: Records mp4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets, web uploads, email attachments, etc. Audio: AAC.

    Note that when File Format is set to AVCHD, the file size of movies is limited to about 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.

    When File Format is set to MP4, the file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, recording will stop automatically.

    Record setting (also for movies)

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. You can change the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bitrate, the higher the image quality. If you’re not familiar with this, leave as is.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD:

    • This records high-definition movies by converting them to MP4 file format using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD:

    • 60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 fields/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in interlaced mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.

    When  File Format is set to MP4:

    • Movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60icompatible devices), approximately 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or approximately 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with AAC audio, MP4 format.

    Menu items details:

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD:

    • 60p 50M/50p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
    • 30p 50M/25p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
    • 24p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps

    When  File Format is set to AVCHD:

    • 60i 24M(FX)*: 50i 24M(FX: Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
    • 60i 17M(FH) (default setting)*: 50i 17M(FH) (default setting)**: Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)
    • 60p 28M(PS): Records the highest image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Max.)
    • 50p 28M(PS): Records the highest image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Max.)
    • 24p 24M(FX): 25p 24M(FX)**: Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
    • 24p 17M(FH)*: 25p 17M(FH)**: Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)

    When [ File Format] is set to MP4:

    • 1920×1080 60p 28M (default setting): Records movies of 1920 × 1080. Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Avg.)
    • 1920×1080 30p 16M (default setting): Records movies of 1920 × 1080. Bit-rate: Approx. 16 Mbps (Avg.)
    • 1920×1080 30p 6M (default setting): Records movies of 1280 × 720. Bit-rate: Approx. 6 Mbps (Avg.)

    General notes:

    • 60p/50p movies can be played back only on compatible devices.
    • Movies recorded with the [60p 28M(PS)]/[50p 28M(PS)]/[60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)]/ [24p 24M(FX)] /[25p 24M(FX)] setting in [ Record Setting] are converted by PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording disc. This conversion can take a long time. Also, you cannot create a disc in the original image quality. If you want to keep the original image quality, store your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.
    • To play back60p/50p/24p/25p movies on a TV, the TV must be compatible with those formats. If the TV is not compatible with the 24p/25p format, 24p/25p movies will be output as 60i/50i movies.
    • You cannot create discs with movies recorded with [XAVC S] or [MP4] recording settings using PlayMemories Home.
    Drive Mode

    You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.

    • Single Shooting (default setting): Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button. Hi: takes about ten images per second, Lo about three.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image after 10 or 2 seconds. (selectable in sub menu) You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a specified number of images continuously after 10, 5 or seconds or 2 seconds (selectable in the sub menu).
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness. (3 images between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu.) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness. (3  images between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with a different color tone according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and the color filter.  (3 images with either LO small changes or Hi large changes)
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing here.

    • Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec).
    • Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing. (0→ → / →0→ ).
    Flash Mode
    Flash off;

    obvious

    Autoflash:

    The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards a bright light.

    Fill-flash:

    The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.

    Slow sync:

    Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode actual does is first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.

    Rear Sync:

    Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’

    Flash compensation:

    Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image.

    Krueger lion

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 3)

    Menu camera icon page 3

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using the flash.

    Focus Mode

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    AF-S:

    With a half-press of the shutter button, the camera will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.

    DMF:

    The Sony DSC-HX90V focuses on your subject and allows you to fine tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the camera to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    MF:

    No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    Focus area

    You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘wide’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    Wide:

    Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.

    Center:

    Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.

    Flexible spot:

    Flexible spot area selects a spot anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center)  You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when set to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)

    Expandable flexible spot

    If the Sony DSC-HX90V IV fails to focus on the single selected point, it uses the focus points around the flexible spot as the second priority area to achieve focus.

    Center Lock-on AF:

    When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the Sony DSC-HX90V tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor to Lock-on AF on the Focus Area setting screen, then select the desired tracking start area using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can move the tracking start area to a specific point by designating the area to be the flexible spot or expand flexible spot. On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the AF range finder frame by rotating the control wheel.

    AF Illuminator:

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the camera to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on.

    Exposure Comp

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 3 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the AutoISO range
    I have this range set between 80-1600 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. When shooting in low light, you might think of using a higher top value (factory setting goes up to 3200).

    Tip: Autofocus will also work better at higher ISO.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 4)

    Menu camera icon page 4

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.
    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.
    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    If you like dark or moody portraits, try setting Metering Mode to Spot or Center, and make sure your subjects face is centrally positioned in the frame. You’ll see that the exposure will be more suitable for the face than when set to Multi.

    White Balance

    You can either:

    • Auto (default setting): The product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
    • Daylight: The color tones are adjusted for the daylight. Shade: The color tones are adjusted for shadiness.
    • Cloudy: The color temperature is adjusted for a cloudy sky. Incandescent: The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or under bright lightings, such as in a photo studio.
    • Incandescent: The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or under bright lights, such as in a photo studio.
    • Fluor.: Warm White: The color temperature is adjusted for warm white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Cool White: The color temperature is adjusted for white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Day White: The color temperature is adjusted for neutral white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Daylight: The color temperature is adjusted for daylight fluorescent lighting.
    • Flash: The color temperature is adjusted for a flash.
    • C.Temp./Filter: Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography.
    • Custom: Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].
    • Custom Setup: Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    • D-Range Optimizer: Auto (default setting): Corrects the brightness automatically.
    • D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5: Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong)
    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the over exposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto (default setting): Corrects the exposure difference automatically. Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ―
    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV: Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimal level between 1.0 EV (weak) and 6.0 EV (strong). For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed of the following exposure levels; −1.0 EV, optimal exposure, and +1.0 EV
    Creative Style

    This menu setting allows you to select the desired image processing. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with [Creative Style], unlike with [Scene Selection] where the product adjusts the exposure.

    • Standard (default setting): For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Portrait: For shooting the skin color in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more.
    • Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

    Contrast, Saturation, and Sharpness can be adjusted for each Creative Style item. Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW). You can perform detailed settings for some of the effects by using the left/right side of the control wheel.

    • Off (default setting): Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Soft Focus: Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
    • HDR Painting: Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    • Miniature: Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature models.
    • Watercolor: Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
    • Illustration: Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.
    Focus Magnifier

    Another quite handy feature if you want to check if your image is in focus. It means that you can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting. Great for shooting in manual focus or DMF. You can also set how long the magnified image will be shown in the Focus Magnif. Time setting. (custom settings).

    Press on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position you want to enlarge using up/down/left/right side of the control wheel. You can change the magnifier scaling in two steps by pressing in the center, and close the focus magnifier mode and return to the normal shooting display by pressing three times

    You can change the magnifier scaling in two steps by pressing in the center, and close the focus magnifier mode and return to the normal shooting display by pressing three times.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 5)

    Menu camera icon page 5

    If you’ve stumbled on my guide trying to find where to turn on Long Exposure noise reduction, I’ll have to disappoint you. Although one on the most requested features, the DSC-HQ90V does not have this functionality.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would chance it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values)

    Center Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the camera is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    Smile/Face Detect

    This is another powerful feature. It can be set to automatically detect on focus on (registered) faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the camera will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool, along with the pivoting screen. It’s also an excellent tool at birthday parties. You can firstly register the birthday boy or girl’s face (See face registration further down) and the camera will recognize and prioritize that face more quickly.

    Soft skin effect

    Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function. I don’t like the results, so on my camera, it is turned off

    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony DSC-HX90V will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. A nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    Cappadocia

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 6)

    Menu camera icon page 6

    Scene Selection

    This allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. This is a very effective way of optimizing your camera according to what type of photography you want to do. Especially so when you’re just starting out and don’t know much about the technical side of photography. The camera will set all the appropriate settings according to you selected scene.

    To change the scene, set the mode dial (on top) to SCN and simply rotate the control wheel on the shooting screen and select a new scene.

    • Portrait: Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
    • Adv. Sports Shooting: Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
    • Landscape: Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
    • Sunset: Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
    • Night Scene: Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
    • Hand-held Twilight: Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.
    • Night Portrait: Shoots night scene portraits using the flash. The flash does not pop-up automatically. Pop-up the flash before shooting.
    • Anti Motion Blur: Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
    • Pet: Allows you to shoot images of your pet with the best settings.
    • Gourmet: Allows you to shoot food arrangements in delicious and bright colors.
    • Beach: Allows you to shoot scenes on the beach in bright and vivid colors even under the sunlight.
    • Snow: Allows you to shoot clear images, preventing sunken colors in snowy scenes or other places where the whole screen appears white.
    • Fireworks: Allows you to shoot images of fireworks in all their splendor.
    • Soft Skin: Allows you to shoot images of faces with a smoother look.
    • High Sensitivity: Allows you to shoot still images even in dark locations without using the flash, and reduces subject blur. This setting also allows you to shoot dark movie scenes more brightly.
    Movie

    You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.

    • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually
    SteadyShot (for movies)

    Sets SteadyShot when shooting movies.

    Here you have three options:

    • Intelligent Active: Provides the most powerful SteadyShot effect. I set it to this.
    • Active (default setting): Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
    • Standard: Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting condition.
    Auto slow shut. (also a movie setting)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark. Less light always means a longer shutter time in order to get a correct exposure. As when shooting stills, you might get some blur when you use this feature.

    On: The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in the dark.

    Off: The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

    Micref Level

    You can select the microphone level for movie recording to Normal (for dialogue) or Low (for concerts etc).

    Wind noise reduct.

    Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise during movie recording.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 7)

    Menu camera icon page 7

    Shooting tip list

    This setting basically turns the on-screen shooting tips on or off. If you’re not fully comfortable with the camera, this is an excellent tool in order to get acquainted with all the functions and settings. Once it starts getting on your nerves, it means you know enough to turn it off :).

    Memory Recall

    Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered in advance.

    • Set the mode dial to MR (Memory recall).
    • Press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the control wheel to select the desired number, then press on the center
    • You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings) → Memory recall.
    Memory

    Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings in the product. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

    Items that can be registered:

    • Shooting mode
    • Aperture (F number)
    • Shutter speed
    • Camera Settings
    • Optical zoom scale

    To recall registered settings: Set the mode dial to MR, then press the right/left side of the control wheel or turn the control wheel to select the desired memory number.

    To change registered settings: Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 1)

    Menu Wheel icon page 1

    Zebra

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.

    The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.

    I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the full picture.

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier on Page 5 of the camera settings. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit.

    Two seconds is how I have it set up.

    Grid Line

    Having a grid line on your screen is a helpful aide for the composition of your image.
    The human brain is hard-wired to recognize the structure, and most people find a well-composed image more eye-pleasing.
    During photography history, rules have been developed on how to compose the different elements best within a scene. Many landscapes you’ll see have the horizon run through the middle of the image for instance, but this is just composition in its simplest form. Many photographers with a thorough understanding of these techniques go far beyond that.
    A good starting point is using the in-camera grid to make your brain aware of the possibilities in composition.
    The Rules of 3rds, Square and Diag +square are available in the Sony HX90V.

    Marker display (for movies)

    Sets whether or not to display markers set using [ Marker Settings] on the monitor while shooting movies.

    Marker settings (for movies)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display all the markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. Off / On
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. Off / 4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 / 1.85:1 / 2.35:1
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. Off / 80% / 90%
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground. Off / On
    MENU – Custom Settings – page 2

    Menu Wheel icon page 2

    Auto Review

    Select the amount of time the camera displays your image directly after capturing the image. 10, 5 and 2 sec is available, or you can turn this feature OFF if it annoys you.

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info; no display info and histogram.

    Peaking Level
    • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.
    • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies; you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
    • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    Exposure set guide

    Sets the guide displayed when exposure settings are changed in the shooting screen.  Excellent tool when you’re getting to know the functionality of your new camera. If you’re familiar with Sony’s feature, turn it OFF.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 3

    Menu Wheel icon page 3

    Zoom Speed

    Sets the zoom speed of the camera’s zoom lever. Sets the zoom speed of the camera’s zoom lever. Be careful when you set this to Fast when recording movies, as the lens will become more noisy.

    • Normal: Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to normal.
    • Fast: Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to fast.
    Zoom setting

    Set to Optical zoom only, using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens. If you set this to digital zoom, the camera will be basically cropping pixels out.

    Finder/Monitor

    Sets the method for switching the display between Electronic Viewfinder and the screen.

    • Auto (default setting): When you look into the Electronic Viewfinder, the display is switched to the Electronic Viewfinder automatically.
    • Viewfinder: Switch between the Electronic Viewfinder display and the screen display by pushing up/down the pop-up finder. When the Electronic Viewfinder is pushed down, the image is displayed only on the screen. When the Electronic Viewfinder is pushed up, the screen is turned off and the image is displayed only in the Electronic Viewfinder.
    Release w/o card

    Basically telling the camera not to engage the shutter when you don’t have a memory card inserted. Set to on.

    Self-portrait/ -timer

    You can change the angle of the monitor and shoot images while watching the monitor. f you want to use another Drive Mode than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set Selfportrait/ -timer to Off, then tilt the monitor upward 180 degrees.

    1. Tilt the monitor approximately 180° upward, and then point the lens at yourself.
    2. Press the shutter button. The product starts the self-timer shooting after three seconds.
    Face Registration

    This is where you can register faces; it works only when face recognition is set to ON (registered faces). This is an interesting functionality, as you can register faces of your subject (like at a wedding the bride and groom) and the camera will automatically detect these registered faces and give autofocus priority to them. You can register up to 8 faces (by taking a picture of them within this menu) and set a priority order.
    Works well, and helps to get the right people in-focus in busy shots.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 4

    Menu Wheel icon page 4

    Write Date

    Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image. Remember that you won’t be able to delete the date stamp on your image if it is turned On.

    Function menu set

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    Custom keys setting

    Assigning functions to the various keys allows you to speed up operations by pressing the appropriate key when the shooting information screen is displayed.

    Zoom Func. on ring

    Sets the zoom functions when using the control ring to change zoom scales. The settings for Zoom Func. on Ring are valid only when auto-focusing.

    • Standard (default setting): Zooms in/out smoothly when you operate the zoom by turning the control ring.
    • Step: Zooms in/out at certain angle steps when you operate the zoom by turning the control ring.
    Movie button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE button.

    • Always (default setting): Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
    • Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to Movie mode.
     RNI ALL FILMS 4.0
    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 1

    Wireless functionality - page 1

    Send To Smartphone
    • You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
    • You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or on the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
    • You’ll have to connect the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the Sony DSC-HX90V screen.
    • It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
    • You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
    • When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to physically connect the computer to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can view images and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

    One Touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.

    I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC) but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 2

    Wireless functionality - page 2

    WPS Push

    If your access point has the WPS button, you can register the access point to the camera easily by pushing the WPS button.

    Access Point Set

    Here you can setup an access point for your camera to the internet.

    It enables the Sony DSC-HX90V to install PlayMemories apps from the internet directly. Works just like setting an access point (WiFi connection) on your phone.

    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6000 is yours in certain situations.

    Disp MAC. address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony DSC-HX90V.

    SSID/PW reset

    The Sony DSC-HX90V shares the connection information for Send to Smartphone and Smart Remote Embedded with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all the network settings to default settings.

    MENU – Playmemories settings- page 1

    Applications playmemories page 1

    Application List

    You’ll find The Smart remote control camera app (wich allows you to use your phone as a remote control via PlayMemories phone app for iPhone and Android) and the Playmemories Camera app here.

    You can access your online PlayMemories account here, or create an account (once you’ve set up your camera connection with your Wifi network).

    Bulb Exposure with the Sony A5100 and A7s

    You’ll also be able to download new apps available for purchase in the Sony Playmemories online app store like the Time-lapse and smooth reflection app.

    If you do not want to connect your camera to the internet, you can always install new apps (and updates) if you connect the camera to your Mac or PC with the supplied USB cable, using the Sony PlayMemories desktop application.

    Introduction

    You’ll find information about the service and available countries and regions here.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    Menu Playback icon page 1

    Delete

    Delete on or multiple images stored on your SD card.

    View Mode

    select how the camera will arrange captured images in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Select whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to automatically rotate images when you rotate the camera or not.

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    SEL2470GM

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    Menu Playback icon page 2

    Enlarge

    Select an image and enlarge a portion of that image. Useful for checking details and focus.

    4K Still Image PB

    Outputs still images in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    Protect

    Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

    Motion Interval ADJ

    Change the interval of the image tracking of the subject’s motion in high-speed, like a stroboscopic image.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    Beauty Effect

    Allows you to apply the Beauty Effect to retouch the still image of a person and make it look better, for example, by retouching it for smoother skin, larger eyes, and whiter teeth. You can set the effects from level 1 to level 5. An image on which the Beauty Effect is used is saved as a new file. The original image is retained as it is.

    • Skin Toning: Adjusts the skin color as you like.
    • Skin Smoothing: Removes age spots and wrinkles from the skin.
    • Shine Removal: Reduces the look of oily skin. Adjusts the skin color as you like.
    • Eye Widening: Enlarges the eyes of the subject.
    • Teeth Whitening: Whiten the teeth of the subject.

    To use two or more effects with Beauty Effect one after another, first apply an effect to the image, then select another effect using.

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    (briefcase) general options - page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Bright.

    When using an electronic viewfinder, you can adjust the brightness of the electronic viewfinder according to the surrounding environment. Leave it on Auto.

    Finder Color Temp.

    Adjusts the color temperature (-2 +2) of the electronic viewfinder.

    Volume settings

    Change the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    Audio Signals

    You can turn off audio signals like the beep when te camera achieves focus. Useful if you want a more stealthy operation (although you’ll still hear the second curtain shutter).

    GPS signals

    You can record the location information with the images when the built-in GPS sensor of this product can acquire the location information. Using the software PlayMemories Home, you can import the images recorded with the location information to a computer and enjoy viewing them on a map which shows their shooting location. Refer to the Help of PlayMemories Home for details.

    • On: The GPS function is activated.
    • Off: The GPS function is turned off. The status icon on the screen may differ depending on the conditions of the signals emitted from the satellites.
    • No icon is displayed: GPS is set to Off or an error has occurred.
    MENU – Setup – page 2

    (briefcase) general options - page 2

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a direct tab style menu layout.

    Mode Dial Guide

    You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change the settings available for that shooting mode. Handy when you are learning how to use the Sony DSC-HX90V.

    Delete confirm

    You can set whether Delete or Cancel is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality. Set to standard to preserve battery life.

    • High: Displays in high quality.
    • Standard: Displays in standard quality.
    Pwr Save Start time

    Selects the time it takes for the camera to go into sleep mode if you don’t use it.

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    (briefcase) general options - page 3

     Function for VF close

    Sets whether to turn the power off when the viewfinder is stowed. This was not available in earlier models, so every time you pushed the EVF inside, the camera would turn OFF. Very annoying, good that this setting is here now.

    PAL/NTSC selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV. If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different video system, a message telling you that you must reformat the card will appear. If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use another memory card.

    Demo Mode

    Demo mode is only used in retail stores for demonstration purposes.

    HDMI settings

    You can find all HDMI connection settings here:

    • HDMI Resolution: When you connect the product to a High Definition TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable, you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV. Auto, 1080p and 1080i are available.
    • CTRL FOR HDMI: When connecting theSony DSC-HX90V to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable, you can operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV. Turn it ON if you want to use it.
    • HDMI Info. Display: Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable.
    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto (default setting): Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.
    Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    (briefcase) general options - page 4

    USB power supply

    You can charge theSony DSC-HX90V via USB. This setting sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

    Language

    Set your preferred language. The advantage of setting it to Eglish is that you’ll find much more information online when you need any troubleshooting.

    Date Time Setup

    Change date, time, date format and Daylight savings time.

    Area setting

    Select your region, or change region when abroad, the camera will automatically change time and date for you.

    Format

    Format your SD card before use; this will erase any images still on the memory card.

    File Number

    Number your files according to a number of shots or reset it to start from 1.

    MENU – Setup – page 5

    (briefcase) general options - page 5

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the camera will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for easily organizing events and locations

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to possibly retrieve lost images.

    Display media info

    Displays the recordable time of movies and the number of recordable still images for the inserted memory card.

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and lens are running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    MENU – Setup – page 6

    (briefcase) general options - page 6

     Setting Reset

    Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

    In the next chapter, I’ll go over all the functionality that I find most useful

    Mode dial functions: what’s the difference between intelligent and superior auto?

    Intelligent Auto

    • This mode lets the camera detect what kind of scene you are photographing. It switches to the scene setting it finds most appropriate, including aperture, shutter speed, ISO, and AF mode.
    • These different scene settings are the same you’ll find manually selectable in SCN mode.
    • All Sony cameras do a good job at detecting scenes, although the advanced photographer will prefer to shoot in Aperture, Shutter priority or fully manual mode in order to have more control over things like depth-of-field, movement, and focusing area.

    Superior Auto

    • Does the same scene recognition and (when the camera decides it is appropriate) adds hand-held twilight, anti-motion blur, and backlight correction HDR in order to optimize dynamic range, movement and exposure.
    • It uses multiple images shot in close succession at high quality and combines them into one jpeg. Works well on stills but should not be used for movement.

    Zebra highlight clipping aide

    Menu Wheel icon page 1

    • Zebra will show zebra pattern lines on blown highlights.
    • The clipping detection threshold is selectable from 70 to 100+. Lower values indicate possible highlight clipping sooner than higher.
    • Setting it somewhere around 90 will give you a good indication of whether you’re in danger of unrecoverable clipping without having the screen cluttered with stripes all the time.

    Focus Peaking

    • This works in MF and DMF focusing modes
    • MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Peaking Level] → desired setting.
    • It displays a color selectable noise in the regions where the focus is on.
    • A low setting is recommended in enough light on the Sony DSC-HX90V.
    • In dim light, you might need to go to medium to get a good idea of where the focus is at.

    Center Lock-on AF

    Menu camera icon page 3

    Center Lock-on AF

    Depending on the options selected in [Focus Area] or [Center Lock-on AF], the available functions varies when pressing the key. Found in the Focus Area setting. When you press the key when the [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Center] and [Center Lock-on AF] is [On], [Center Lock-on AF] will activate. The camera will automatically focus while pressing the key when the [Focus Area] is [Wide] or [Center], [Focus Mode] is set to other than [Manual Focus], and [Center Lock on AF] is set to [Off].

    • When you press the center button, the camera detects the subject positioned in the center of the screen and continues to track the subject.
    • MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Center Lock-on AF] → [On]
    • Align the target frame (A) over the subject and press in the center of the control wheel. Press again to stop tracking.
    • If the camera loses track of the subject, it can detect when the subject reappears on the monitor and resume tracking.
    • Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

    Smile/face detect

    When set to On, The Sony DSC-HX90V will automatically detect and focus on faces. This is a very powerful feature and can even be made faster by registering faces beforehand. You can even prioritize any of the 8 registered faces according to importance. Ideal for a wedding or family reunion when you know the persons who you are going to photograph.

    1. Go to MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Smile/Face Detect.] and select either
    2. On (Regist. Faces): Detects the registered face with higher priority using Face Registration.
    3. On: Detects a face without giving higher priority to the registered face.

    SEL35F14Z

    How to register faces:

    • MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].
    • Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    • When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

    Conclusion

    Welcome to the wonderful world of photography with the Sony DSC-HX90V. Although this compact camera deemed an enthusiast oriented or ‘beginner’ camera, you’ll find that it has many of the advanced features of the Sony RX and even ILC line. If you’re just starting out in photography, I would suggest taking a look at the SCN or Scene selections that give you a good starting point for any type of activity or subject you’d like to shoot. Another feature worth mentioning is Face recognition and registration that allows you to actually register someone’s face inside the camera and prioritize autofocus to that face.

    There are many hidden features and functions like this inside the Sony HQ90V, and I would suggest taking some time to learn some of them. I know that and advanced guide like this looks daunting at first, but you’ll soon get the hang of it by easily following along with your camera’s menu system.

  • Sony RX100 V guide settings, tips and tricks

    Sony RX100 V settings, tips, and tricks

    Introduction

    Welcome to my Sony RX100 V advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this nice little compact camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.

    If you’re coming from earlier versions, the latest Sony RX100 V has a few added features compared to those, and you’ll see a few new features in the menus too.  The most noteworthy are:

    • the addition of an LSI chip allowing for faster write times to SD card.
    • 315 on sensor phase detection AF points (in comparison to a contrast only autofocus system in the older models.

    First things first: make sure you are running the latest firmware version 2.00 (2017).

    By the way, I have different guides with tips and settings for the other RX100 series cameras too:

    Sony RX100 V tips settings tricks

    Since the Sony RX100 V has the same menu layout as recently released Sony Alpha cameras, you’ll quickly find your way around if you already own one of those.

    I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way. If you’re a bit impatient, there is a more abbreviated “best settings” chapter before my conclusion.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on yourSony RX100 V, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 1)

    RX100 V menu

    Image size:

    The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

    Image size when the aspect ratio is 3:2:

    • L: 20M 5472×3648 pixels
    • M: 10M 3888×2592 pixels
    • S: 5.0M 2736×1824 pixels

    Image size when the aspect ratio is 4:3:

    • L: 18M 4864×3648 pixels
    • M: 10M 3648×2736 pixels
    • S: 5.0M 2592×1944 pixels VGA 640×480 pixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 16:9

    • L: 17M 5472×3080 pixels
    • M: 7.5M 3648×2056 pixels
    • S: 4.2M 2720×1528 pixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 1:1

    • L: 13M 3648×3648 pixels
    • M: 6.5M 2544×2544 pixels
    • S: 3.7M 1920×1920 pixels

    Note that when Quality is set to RAW or RAW & JPEG, the image size for RAW images is automatically set to L for optimal quality.

    If SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 4:3, 1:1 or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    Quality:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A RAW file saves all information the Sony RX100 V pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.
    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    Img. Size (dual REC)

    Selects the size of still images to be shot while recording movies. Only Jpeg.

    • L: 17M
    • M: 7.5M
    • S: 4.2M
    Quality (dual Rec)

    Selects the quality of still images to be shot while recording movies. Only Jpeg.

    • Extra fine
    • Fine
    • Standard

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 2)

    Menu camera icon page 2

     

    File format (for movies)

    Selects the movie file format.

    • XAVC S 4K: Records high-definition movies in XAVC S 4K. This format supports a higher bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • AVCHD HD (default setting): Records high-definition movies in XAVC S HD. This format supports a higher bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    • MP4: Records mp4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets, web uploads, email attachments, etc. Audio: AAC.

    Note that when recording XAVC S format movies, you should use the following memory cards:

    • SDXC memory card (64 GB or more and Class 10 or faster)
    • SDXC memory card (64 GB or more and UHS-I-compatible)
    • Memory Stick XC-HG Duo media
    Record setting (also for movies)

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. You can change the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bitrate, the higher the image quality. If you’re not familiar with this, leave as is.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K and HD:

    • This records high-definition movies by converting them to MP4 file format using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD:

    • 60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 fields/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in interlaced mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.

    When  File Format is set to MP4:

    • Movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60icompatible devices), approximately 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or approximately 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with AAC audio, MP4 format.

    Menu items details:

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K:

    • 30p 100M/25p 100M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
    • 30p 60M/25p 60M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps
    • 24p 100M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
    • 24p 60M: Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD:

    • 60p 50M/50p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
    • 30p 50M/25p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (30p/25p). Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
    • 24p 50M: Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
    • 120p 100M/100p 100M: Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at 120 fps/100 fps. You can create smoother slow-motion images using compatible editing equipment. Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
    • 120p 60M/100p 60M: Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at 120 fps/100 fps. You can create smoother slow-motion images using compatible editing equipment. Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps

    When  File Format is set to AVCHD:

    • 60i 24M(FX)*: 50i 24M(FX)**: Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
    • 60i 17M(FH) (default setting)*: 50i 17M(FH) (default setting)**: Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)
    • 60p 28M(PS)*:
    • 50p 28M(PS)**: Records the highest image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Max.)
    • 24p 24M(FX)*: 25p 24M(FX)**: Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
    • 24p 17M(FH)*: 25p 17M(FH)**: Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinemalike atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)

    When [ File Format] is set to MP4:

    • 1440×1080 12M (default setting): Records movies of 1440 × 1080. Bit-rate: Approx. 12 Mbps (Avg.)
    • VGA 3M: Records movies of VGA size. Bit-rate: Approx. 3 Mbps (Avg.) *
    • Notes:* 1080 60i (NTSC) compatible device,  ** 1080 50i (PAL) compatible device

    General notes:

    • 60p/50p movies can be played back only on compatible devices.
    • Movies recorded with the [60p 28M(PS)]/[50p 28M(PS)]/[60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)]/ [24p 24M(FX)] /[25p 24M(FX)] setting in [ Record Setting] are converted by PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording disc. This conversion can take a long time. Also, you cannot create a disc in the original image quality. If you want to keep the original image quality, store your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.
    • To play back 24p/25p movies on a TV, the TV must be compatible with the 24p/25p formats. If the TV is not compatible with the 24p/25p format, 24p/25p movies will be output as 60i/50i movies.
    • You cannot create discs with movies recorded with [XAVC S] or [MP4] recording settings using PlayMemories Home.
    Dual Video Rec

    Allows you to simultaneously record an XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie. On or Off.

    HFR settings

    By shooting with a higher frame rate than the recording format, you can record a smooth super-slow-motion movie.

    1. Set the mode dial to High Frame Rate. The HFR setting screen will be displayed.
    2. Select MENU→ Camera Settings→HFR Settings and select the desired settings for Record Setting, Frame Rate, Priority Setting, and REC Timing. You can adjust the desired exposure mode by selecting MENU→ camera Settings→High Frame Rate. You can set other shooting settings such as focus area, focus mode, and frame rate, and perform zooming on the HFR setting screen.
    3. Press the in the center of the control wheel. The HFR shooting screen will be displayed. To change the settings, press in the center once again to switch to the HFR setting screen.
    4. Press the MOVIE button. The camera will automatically start recording as soon as you finish shooting
    Menu item details
    • HFR Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie from 60p 50M/50p 50M, 30p 50M/25p 50M, and 24p 50M.
    • HFR Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate from 240fps/250fps, 480fps/500fps, and 960fps/1000fps.
    • FFR Priority Setting: Select Quality Priority or Shoot Time Priority. If you select Shoot Time Priority, the recordable duration is longer than in Quality Priority mode.
    • HFR REC Timing: Selects whether to record a set amount of time after pressing the MOVIE button (Start Trigger), or to record for a set amount of time until you press the MOVIE button (End Trigger).

    Krueger lion

    Panorama size

    (Only available when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the Sony RX100 V to do efficiently.

    Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    You can make panoramas while scanning your Sony ILCE-RX100M5 up-down or left-right. So what is this all about? This might sound confusing at first, but this comes down to how you hold the Sony RX100 IV when shooting panoramas: either in portrait or landscape orientation.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 3)

    Menu camera icon page 3

    Drive Mode

    You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.

    • Single Shooting (default setting): Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button. Hi: takes about six images per second, Lo about 3
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image after 10 or 2 seconds. (selectable in sub menu) You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a specified number of images continuously after 10 seconds or 2 seconds (selectable in the sub menu).
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu.) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with a different color tone according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and the color filter.  (3 images with either LO small changes or Hi large changes)
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing here.

    Flash Mode
    Flash off;

    Turn the flash off, even if the flash unit is popped up.

    Autoflash:

    The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards a bright light.

    Fill-flash:

    The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.

    Slow sync:

    Tells the Sony RX100 V to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode actual does is first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.

    Rear Sync:

    Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’

     Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image.

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 4)

    Menu camera icon page 4

     

    Focus Mode

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    AF-S:

    With a half-press of the shutter button, theSony RX100 V will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.

    AF-A

    Single-shot AF and Continuous AF are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to focus when the subject is in motion.

    AF-C:

    The camera will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.

    DMF:

    The RX100 Mark 3 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the camera to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    MF:

    No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    Focus area

    You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘wide’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    Wide:

    Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.

    Center:

    Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony RX100 V to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.

    Flexible spot:

    Flexible spot area selects a spot anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center)  You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when set to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)

    Expandable flexible spot

    If the Sony RX100 IV fails to focus on the single selected point, it uses the focus points around the flexible spot as the second priority area to achieve focus.

    Lock-on AF:

    When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the RX100M5 tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor to Lock-on AF on the Focus Area setting screen, then select the desired tracking start area using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can move the tracking start area to a desired point by designating the area to be the flexible spot or expand flexible spot. On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the AF range finder frame by rotating the control wheel.

    Phase detection AF: When there is phase detection AF points within the autofocus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the phase detection AF and contrast AF.

    AF Illuminator:

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony RX100V to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on.

    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):
    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the AutoISO range
    I have this range set between 100-1600 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. If you’re a jpeg shooter (and use built-in Noise Reduction), you might think of using a higher top value (factory setting goes up to 12800).

    ISO AUTO Min. SS

    Probably one of the most powerful new features, you can now select when the Sony RX100 V will go to a higher ISO in order to get an appropriate shutter speed. Great for shooting moving subjects.

    If you select ISO AUTO under Multi Frame NR when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.

    • FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and subject blurring.
    • STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
    • SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less noise.
    • 1/32000―30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 5)

    Menu camera icon page 5

    ND filter

    From the Mark 3 onwards, the Sony comes with a built-in 3 stop ND filter. If you use an ND filter, the amount of light entering the lens is reduced. You can slow down the shutter speed and decrease the aperture value for a better exposure.

    • Auto (default setting): Automatically turns on the ND filter based on the shooting mode and brightness.
    • On: Always uses built-in ND Filter.
    • Off: Disables the ND Filter function.
    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.
    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.
    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    White Balance

    You can either:

    • Auto (default setting): The product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
    • Daylight: The color tones are adjusted for the daylight. Shade: The color tones are adjusted for shadiness.
    • Cloudy: The color temperature is adjusted for a cloudy sky. Incandescent: The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or under bright lightings, such as in a photo studio.
    • Fluor.: Warm White: The color temperature is adjusted for warm white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Cool White: The color temperature is adjusted for white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Day White: The color temperature is adjusted for neutral white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Daylight: The color temperature is adjusted for daylight fluorescent lighting.
    • Flash: The color temperature is adjusted for a flash.
    • Underwater Auto: The color temperature is adjusted for underwater shooting.
    • C.Temp./Filter: Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography.
    • Custom: Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].
    • Custom Setup: Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
    • Underwater Auto (New in the Sony RX100 V firmware update 2.0 (2017)) for use with the MPK-URX100A Underwater Housing
    Cappadocia
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    • D-Range Optimizer: Auto (default setting): Corrects the brightness automatically.
    • D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5: Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong)
    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the over exposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto (default setting): Corrects the exposure difference automatically. Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ―
    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV: Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimal level between 1.0 EV (weak) and 6.0 EV (strong). For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed of the following exposure levels; −1.0 EV, optimal exposure, and 1.0 EV
    Creative Style

    This menu setting allows you to select the desired image processing. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with [Creative Style], unlike with [Scene Selection] where the product adjusts the exposure.

    • Standard (default setting): For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Portrait: For shooting the skin color in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more.
    • Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

    Contrast, Saturation, and Sharpness can be adjusted for each Creative Style item. Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony RX100 V, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off (default setting): Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Soft Focus: Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
    • HDR Painting: Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    • Miniature: Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature models.
    • Watercolor: Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
    • Illustration: Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 6)

    Menu camera icon page 6

    Picture profile

    Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc for movies.

    Using the preset of picture profile

    The default settings [PP1] through [PP7] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting conditions.

    • PP1: Example setting using [Movie] gamma
    • PP2: Example setting using [Still] gamma
    • PP3: Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma
    • PP4: Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard
    • PP5: Example setting using [Cine1] gamma
    • PP6: Example setting using [Cine2] gamma
    • PP7: Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma
    Items of the picture profile
    • Black Level Sets the black level. (–15 to 15)
    • Gamma Selects a gamma curve. Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies Still: Standard gamma curve for still images Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33) Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30) ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709. ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [SLog2]. S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.
    • Black Gamma Corrects gamma in low-intensity areas. Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow) Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to 7 (maximum black stretch))
    • Knee Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera. When selecting [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] in [Gamma], [Knee] is set to [Off] if [Mode] is set to [Auto]. To use functions in [Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual]. Mode: Selects auto/manual settings. Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically. Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually. Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode]. Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%) Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High/Mid/Low) Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode]. Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%) Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to 5 (steep))
    • Color Mode Sets type and level of colors. Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie]. Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still]. Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1]. Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU709 gamma) ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma) Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white. S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
    • Saturation Sets the color saturation. (-32 to 32)
    • Color Phase Sets the color phase. (-7 to 7)
    • Color Depth Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White]. [R] -7 (light red) to 7 (deep red) [G] -7 (light green) to 7 (deep green) [B] -7 (light blue) to 7 (deep blue) [C] -7 (light cyan) to 7 (deep cyan) [M] -7 (light magenta) to 7 (deep magenta) [Y] -7 (light yellow) to 7 (deep yellow)
    • Detail Sets items for [Detail]. Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to 7) Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually. Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.)) V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to 2 (off to the horizontal (H) side)) B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side)) Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
    • Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level)) Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high-intensity areas. (0 to 4)
    • Copy Copies the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy]
    • Reset Resets the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset]
    Focus Magnifier

    Another new and quite handy feature if you want to check if your image is in focus. It means that you can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting. Great for shooting in manual focus or DMF. You can also set how long the magnified image will be shown in the Focus Magnif. Time setting. (custom settings)/

    Press on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position you want to enlarge using up/down/left/right side of the control wheel. You can change the magnifier scaling in two steps by pressing in the center, and close the focus magnifier mode and return to the normal shooting display by pressing three times.

    Long exposure NR

    Yes, finally it’s here for Sony RX100 users, Long exposure Noise Reduction. This kicks in when you set the shutter speed to 1/3 second or longer. Noise reduction is turned on for the duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would chance it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values)

    Center Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the camera is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the Sony RX100 V will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    Smile/Face Detect

    This is another powerful feature. It can be set to automatically detect on focus on (registered) faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the Sony RX100 V will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool, along with the pivoting screen.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 7)

    Menu camera icon page 7

    Auto Dual Rec.

    Sets whether or not to automatically shoot still images when shooting movies. Shoots when impressive compositions, including people, are detected. This function may also record versions of the automatically shot images that have been trimmed into optimal compositions. When a trimmed image is recorded, both the image before trimming and the trimmed image will be recorded.

    Soft skin effect

    Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function. I don’t like the results, so on my camera, it is turned off

    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony RX100 IV will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    Auto Mode
    Scene Selection

    This allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. To change the scene, simply rotate the control wheel on the shooting screen and select a new scene.

    • Portrait: Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
    • Sports Action: Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
    • Macro: Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
    • Landscape: Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
    • Sunset: Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
    • Night Scene: Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
    • Hand-held Twilight: Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.
    • Night Portrait: Shoots night scene portraits using the flash. The flash does not pop-up automatically. Pop-up the flash before shooting.
    • Anti Motion Blur: Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
    • Pet: Allows you to shoot images of your pet with the best settings.
    • Gourmet: Allows you to shoot food arrangements in delicious and bright colors.
    • Fireworks: Allows you to shoot images of fireworks in all their splendor.
    • High Sensitivity: Allows you to shoot still images even in dark locations without using the flash, and reduces subject blur. Also allows you to shoot dark movie scenes more brightly
    • Movie
    High Frame rate

    You can select the exposure mode for HFR shooting based on the subject and effect you want.

    Either:

    • Program Auto
    • Aperture Priority
    • Shutter Priority
    • Manual Exposure
    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 8)

    Menu camera icon page 8

    Movie

    You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.

    • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually
    Steadyshot (stills)

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (also known as image stabilization) function for photography. Steadyshot allows you to take sharp pictures at longer shutter speeds (say on a cloudy day). It stabilizes your image and is a very powerful feature. Set it to ON, except when shooting on a tripod.

    Zeiss Batis 85mm f/1.8 image example
    SteadyShot (movies)

    Sets SteadyShot when shooting movies.

    Here you have three options:

    • Intelligent Active: Provides the most powerful SteadyShot effect. I set it to this.
    • Active (default setting): Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
    • Standard: Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range)RGB. If you don’t know what this means, leave it to standard.

    Auto Slow Shutter (movie mode)

    Sets whether to adjust the shutter speed automatically during video recording in case if the subject is dark/ Set to ON.

    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 9)
    Menu camera icon page 9
    Micref Level

    You can select the microphone level for movie recording to Normal (for dialogue) or Low (for concerts etc).

    Wind noise reduct.

    Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise during movie recording.

    Memory Recall

    Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes orS ony RX100 V settings registered in advance.

    • Set the mode dial to MR (Memory recall).
    • Press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the control wheel to select the desired number, then press on the center
    • You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings) → Memory recall.
    Memory

    Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings in the product. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

    Items that can be registered:

    • Shooting mode
    • Aperture (F number)
    • Shutter speed
    • Camera Settings
    • Optical zoom scale

    To recall registered settings: Set the mode dial to MR, then press the right/left side of the control wheel or turn the control wheel to select the desired memory number.

    To change registered settings: Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 1)

    Menu Wheel icon page 1

    Zebra

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the full picture. As I capture in RAW, I am very careful not to have any highlight clipping, to be able to recover highlights in Lightroom possibly entirely.

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier on Page 5 of the camera settings. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    Grid Line

    Having a grid line on your screen is a helpful aide for the composition of your image.
    The human brain is hard-wired to recognize the structure, and most people find a well-composed image more eye-pleasing.
    During photography history, rules have been developed on how to compose the different elements best within a scene. Many landscapes you’ll see have the horizon run through the middle of the image for instance, but this is just composition in its simplest form. Many photographers with a thorough understanding of these techniques go far beyond that.
    A good starting point is using the in-camera grid to make your brain aware of the possibilities in composition.
    The Rules of 3rds, Square and Diag square are available in the Sony Alpha ILCE-5100.

    Marker display (for movies)

    Sets whether or not to display markers set using [ Marker Settings] on the monitor while shooting movies.

    Marker settings (for movies)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display all the markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. Off / On
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. Off / 4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 / 1.85:1 / 2.35:1
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. Off / 80% / 90%
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground. Off / On
    AF Area Auto Clear

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

    Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

    Sets the initial magnification when an enlarged image is displayed with [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

    Phase Detect. Area

    Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 2

    Menu Wheel icon page 2

    Auto Review

    Select the amount of time the camera displays your image directly after capturing the image. 10, 5 and 2 sec is available, or you can turn this feature OFF if it annoys you.

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info; no dips info and histogram.

    Peaking Level
    • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.
    • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies; you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
    • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    Exposure set guide

    Sets the guide displayed when exposure settings are changed in the shooting screen.  Excellent tool when you’re getting to know the functionality of your new camera. If you’re familiar with Sony’s feature, turn it OFF.

    Live view Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier auto-focussing in low-light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 3

    Menu Wheel icon page 3

    Pre AF

    When pre-AF is set to ON, the camera will continuously focus, even without half-pressing the shutter button. This can be draining to the battery, especially when using some lenses like the Zeiss Touit range. Set it to OFF.

    Many People prefer to set Pre-AF off. This to prevent the camera from constantly trying to acquire focus without pressing the shutter button. It also saves battery life.

    Zoom speed

    Sets the zoom speed of the camera’s zoom lever. The Zoom Speed settings are also used when you are zooming with a remote controller.

    • Normal: Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to normal.
    • Fast: Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to fast.
    Zoom settings

    Set to Optical zoom only, using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens. If you set this to digital zoom, the camera will be basically cropping pixels out.

    Finder/Monitor

    Sets the method for switching the display between Electronic Viewfinder and the screen.

    • Auto (default setting): When you look into the Electronic Viewfinder, the display is switched to the Electronic Viewfinder automatically.
    • Viewfinder: Switch between the Electronic Viewfinder display and the screen display by pushing up/down the pop-up finder. When the Electronic Viewfinder is pushed down, the image is displayed only on the screen. When the Electronic Viewfinder is pushed up, the screen is turned off and the image is displayed only in the Electronic Viewfinder.
    Release w/o card

    Basically telling the Sony RX100 V not to engage the shutter when you don’t have a memory card inserted. Set to on.

    AEL with shutter

    Selects whether to fix exposure automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that the subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is canceled.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.
    MENU – Custom Settings – page 4

    Menu Wheel icon page 4

    Shutter type (for stills)

    You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.

    • Auto: The shutter type will automatically switch based on the shooting conditions and shutter speed.
    • Mechanical Shut.: Shoot with the mechanical shutter only. (Flash will work on Shutter speed: BULB to 1/2000 second)
    • Electronic Shut.: Shoot with the electronic shutter only. (Flash will work on Shutter speed: 30 seconds to 1/32000 second)
    Self-portrait timer

    You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.

    1.  Tilt the LCD screen 180° upward, and then point the lens at yourself.
    2. Press the shutter button. The product starts the self-timer shooting after three seconds. Hint If you want to use another Drive Mode than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set [Selfportrait/ -timer] to [Off], then tilt the monitor upward approx. 180 degrees.
    3. Hint If you want to use another Drive Mode than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set Self-portrait/ -timer to Off, then tilt the monitor upward approx. 180 degrees.
     RNI ALL FILMS 4.0
    Face Registration

    This is where you can register faces; it works only when face recognition is set to ON (registered faces). This is an interesting functionality, as you can register faces of your subject (like at a wedding the bride and groom) and the camera will automatically detect these registered faces and give autofocus priority to them. You can register up to 8 faces (by taking a picture of them within this menu) and set a priority order.
    Works well, and helps to get the right people in-focus in busy shots.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 5

    Menu Wheel icon page 5

    Function menu set

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    Custom keys setting

    Assigning functions to the various keys allows you to speed up operations by pressing the appropriate key when the shooting information screen is displayed.

    Zoom Func. on ring

    Sets the zoom functions when using the control ring to change zoom scales. The settings for Zoom Func. on Ring are valid only when auto-focusing.

    • Standard (default setting): Zooms in/out smoothly when you operate the zoom by turning the control ring.
    • Step: Zooms in/out at certain angle steps when you operate the zoom by turning the control ring.
    Movie button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE button.

    • Always (default setting): Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
    • Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to Movie mode.
    Wheel lock

    You can set whether the wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 1

    Wireless functionality - page 1

    Send To Smartphone
    • You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
    • You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or on the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
    • You’ll have to connect the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the Sony RX100 IV screen.
    • It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
    • You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
    • When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to physically connect the computer to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can view images and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

    One Touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.

    I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC) but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 2

    Wireless functionality - page 2

    WPS Push

    If your access point has the WPS button, you can register the access point to the camera easily by pushing the WPS button.

    Access Point Set

    Here you can setup an access point for your camera to the internet.

    It enables the Sony RX100 II to install PlayMemories apps from the internet directly. Works just like setting an access point (WiFi connection) on your phone.

    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6000 is yours in certain situations.

    Disp MAC. address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony RX100M5.

    SSID/PW reset

    The RX100 III  shares the connection information for Send to Smartphone and Smart Remote Embedded with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    MENU – Playmemories settings- page 1

    Applications playmemories page 1

    Application List

    You’ll find The Smart remote control camera app (wich allows you to use your phone as a remote control via PlayMemories phone app for iPhone and Android) and the Playmemories Camera app here.

    You can access your online PlayMemories account here, or create an account (once you’ve set up your camera connection with your Wifi network).

    Bulb Exposure with the Sony A5100 and A7s

    You’ll also be able to download new apps available for purchase in the Sony Playmemories online app store like the Time-lapse and smooth reflection app.

    If you do not want to connect your Sony RX100 V to the internet, you can always install new apps (and updates) if you connect the camera to your Mac or PC with the supplied USB cable, using the Sony PlayMemories desktop application.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    Menu Playback icon page 1

    Delete

    Delete on or multiple images stored on your SD card.

    View Mode

    select how the camera will arrange captured images in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Select whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the Sony RX100 V to automatically rotate images when you rotate the camera or not.

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    SEL2470GM

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    Menu Playback icon page 2

    Enlarge

    Select an image and enlarge a portion of that image. Useful for checking details and focus.

    4K Still Image PB

    Outputs still images in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    Protect

    Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

    Motion Interval ADJ

    Change the interval of the image tracking of the subject’s motion in high-speed, like a stroboscopic image.

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    Beauty Effect

    Allows you to apply the Beauty Effect to retouch the still image of a person and make it look better, for example, by retouching it for smoother skin, larger eyes, and whiter teeth. You can set the effects from level 1 to level 5. An image on which the Beauty Effect is used is saved as a new file. The original image is retained as it is.

    • Skin Toning: Adjusts the skin color as you like.
    • Skin Smoothing: Removes age spots and wrinkles from the skin.
    • Shine Removal: Reduces the look of oily skin. Adjusts the skin color as you like.
    • Eye Widening: Enlarges the eyes of the subject.
    • Teeth Whitening: Whiten the teeth of the subject.

    To use two or more effects with Beauty Effect one after another, first apply an effect to the image, then select another effect using.

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    (briefcase) general options - page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Bright.

    When using an electronic viewfinder, you can adjust the brightness of the electronic viewfinder according to the surrounding environment. Leave it on Auto.

    Finder Color Temp.

    Adjusts the color temperature (-2 2) of the electronic viewfinder.

    Volume settings

    Change the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    Audio Signals

    You can turn off audio signals like the beep when the Sony RX100 V achieves focus. Useful if you want a more stealthy operation (although you’ll still hear the second curtain shutter).

    MENU – Setup – page 2

    (briefcase) general options - page 2

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a direct tab style menu layout

    Mode Dial Guide

    You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change the settings available for that shooting mode. Handy when you are learning how to use the RX100 II.

    Delete confirm

    You can set whether Delete or Cancel is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality. Set to standard to preserve battery life.

    • High: Displays in high quality.
    • Standard: Displays in standard quality.
    Pwr Save Start time

    Selects the time it takes for the Sony RX100 V to go into sleep mode if you don’t use it.

     Function for VF close

    Sets whether to turn the power off when the viewfinder is stowed. This was not available in the Mark III, so every time you pushed the EVF inside, the camera would turn OFF. Very annoying, good that this setting is here now.

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    (briefcase) general options - page 3

    NTSC/PAL selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV. If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different video system, a message telling you that you must reformat the card will appear. If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use another memory card.

    Demo Mode

    Demo mode is only used in retail stores for demonstration purposes.

    TC/UB settings

    The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.

    • TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    • TC Preset: Sets the time code.
    • UB Preset: Sets the user bit. TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code.
    • TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    • TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    • UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
    How to set the time code (TC Preset):
    1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset], then press in the center of the control wheel.
    2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits. The time code can be set between the following range. (When [60i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29 When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames. When [50i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24)
    3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.
    How to reset the time code:
    1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] →[TC Preset], then press in the center of the control wheel.
    2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00:00)
    How to set the user bit (UB Preset)
    1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset], then press in the center of the control wheel.
    2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
    3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.
    How to reset the user bit
    1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset], then press in the center of the control wheel.
    2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).
    How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format);

    MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format], then press in the center of the control wheel.

    • DF: Records the time code in Drop Frame format.
    • NDF: Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
    How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run);

    MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run], then press in the center of the control wheel.

    • Rec Run: Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from the last time code of the previous recording.
    • Free Run: Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.
    How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make):

    MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make], then press in the center of the control wheel.

    • Preset: Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
    • Regenerate: Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.
    HDMI settings

    You can find all HDMI connection settings here:

    • HDMI Resolution: When you connect the product to a High Definition TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable, you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV. Auto, 1080p and 1080i are available.
    • CTRL FOR HDMI: When connecting the Sony RX100 IV to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable, you can operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV. Turn it ON if you want to use it.
    • HDMI Info. Display: Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable.
    4K output sel.

    You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to external recording/playback devices, etc.

    • Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(25p): Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your Sony RX100 V to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto (default setting): Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    (briefcase) general options - page 4

    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.
    Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB power supply

    You can charge the Sony RX100 II via USB. This setting sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

    Language

    Set your preferred language. The advantage of setting it to Eglish is that you’ll find much more information online when you need any troubleshooting.

    Date Time Setup

    Change date, time, date format and Daylight savings time.

    Area setting

    Select your region, or change region when abroad, the camera will automatically change time and date for you.

    Copyright info

    You should always insert your credentials here. Your copyright will be written to the image file.

    MENU – Setup – page 5

    (briefcase) general options - page 5

    Format

    Format your SD card before use; this will erase any images still on the memory card.

    File Number

    Number your files according to number of shots or reset it to start from 1

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the camera will store newly captured images

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for easily organizing events and locations

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to possibly retrieve lost images.

    MENU – Setup – page 6

     (briefcase) general options - page 6
    Display media info

    Displays the recordable time of movies and the number of recordable still images for the inserted memory card.

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your Sony RX100 V and lens are running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the Sony RX100 V to factory settings.

    In the next chapter, I’ll go over all the functionality that I find most useful

    Mode dial functions: what’s the difference between intelligent and superior auto?

    Intelligent Auto

    • This mode lets the camera detect what kind of scene you are photographing. It switches to the scene setting it finds most appropriate, including aperture, shutter speed, ISO, and AF mode.
    • These different scene settings are the same you’ll find manually selectable in SCN mode.
    • All Sony cameras do a good job at detecting scenes, although the advanced photographer will prefer to shoot in Aperture, Shutter priority or fully manual mode in order to have more control over things like depth-of-field, movement, and focusing area.

    Superior Auto

    • Does the same scene recognition and (when theSony RX100 V decides it is appropriate) adds hand-held twilight, anti-motion blur, and backlight correction HDR in order to optimize dynamic range, movement, and exposure.
    • This is only for jpeg shooters, as it uses multiple images shot in close succession at high quality and combines them into one jpeg. Works well on stills but should not be used for movement.

    Zebra highlight clipping aide

    Menu Wheel icon page 1

     

    • Zebra will show zebra pattern lines on blown highlights.
    • The clipping detection threshold is selectable from 70 to 100 . Lower values indicate possible highlight clipping sooner than higher.
    • Setting it somewhere around 90 will give you a good indication of whether you’re in danger of unrecoverable clipping without having the screen cluttered with stripes all the time.

    Manual Focus Assist and Focus Peaking

    Sony RX100 III

    There are two manual focusing assist functions:

    MF assist

    • When set to ON, Magnification will automatically magnify a selectable (through the menu) part of you image when in Manual Focus Mode (MF).
    • MENU → (Custom Settings) → [ MF Assist] → [On].
    • The duration of the magnification can also be set to either 2 sec, 5 sec or no limit in the menu Focus Magnification Time. (MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.)
    • You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
    1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Focus Magnifier].
    2. Press on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position you want to enlarge using up/down/left/right side of the control wheel.
    3. You can change the magnifier scaling in two steps by pressing in the center, and close the focus magnifier mode and return to the normal shooting display by pressing three times.
    4. Confirm the focus.
    5. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

    Peaking

    • This works in MF and DMF focusing modes
    • MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Peaking Level] → desired setting.
    • It displays a color selectable noise in the regions where the focus is on.
    • A low setting is recommended in enough light on the Sony RX100 IV.
    • In dim light, you might need to go to medium to get a good idea of where the focus is at.

     

    Center Lock-on AF

    Sony RX100 III

    Center Lock-on AF

    Depending on the options selected in [Focus Area] or [Center Lock-on AF], the available functions varies when pressing the key. When you press the key when the [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Center] and [Center Lock-on AF] is [On], [Center Lock-on AF] will activate. The Sony RX100 V will automatically focus while pressing the key when the [Focus Area] is [Wide] or [Center], [Focus Mode] is set to other than [Manual Focus], and [Center Lock on AF] is set to [Off].

    • When you press the center button, the camera detects the subject positioned in the center of the screen and continues to track the subject.
    • MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Center Lock-on AF] → [On]
    • Align the target frame (A) over the subject and press in the center of the control wheel. Press again to stop tracking.
    • If the camera loses track of the subject, it can detect when the subject reappears on the monitor and resume tracking.
    • Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

    Smile/face detect

    When set to On, The Sony RX100 IV will automatically detect and focus on faces. This is a very powerful feature and can even be made faster by registering faces beforehand. You can even prioritize any of the 8 registered faces according to importance. Ideal for a wedding or family reunion when you know the persons who you are going to photograph.

    1. Go to MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Smile/Face Detect.] and select either
    2. On (Regist. Faces): Detects the registered face with higher priority using Face Registration.
    3. On: Detects a face without giving higher priority to the registered face.

    SEL35F14Z

    How to register faces:

    • MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].
    • Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    • When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

    Eye AF

    Eye AF is great for portraiture and large apertures. With a shallow depth of field, it is at times difficult to get the appearance of a well-focussed face. The AF system could wonder to an ear or a chin when you finally get that exact shot that you’re looking for.

    Eye EF eliminates this problem by detecting your subject’s eyes and placing the focus point there. It tracks them too. You’ll need to assign a button of your choice in order to make this work.

    1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → assign the [Eye AF] function to the desired button.
    2. Point the Sony RX100 V at a person’s face, and press the button to which you have assigned the [Eye AF] function.
    3. Press the shutter button while pressing the button.

    Exposure aides

    Sony RX100 III

    AE lock

    • When contrast between the subject and background is high, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and shut the exposure before shooting.
    • You’ll need to assign a button to this function to do this in Menu – Custom Settings – Custom Key Setting and then assign the AEL toggle to the desired key.

    Then:

    1. Center the spot at which the exposure is to your liking
    2. Press the button to which the  AEL toggle function is assigned
    3. exposure will be locked, and AE lock lights up.
    4. Focus on your subject and press the shutter button.
    5. To cancel the exposure lock, press the button to which the AEL toggle function is assigned.

    It’s easiest to select the AEL hold function in Custom Key Settings; then you can lock the exposure as long as
    you are holding down the AEL button.

    ND Filter and Bulb mode

    Sony RX100 III

    ND Filter

    • The RX100 IV has a 3 EV-stop ND filter. This is sufficient to enable you to get that smooth waterfall or flowing river picture.  
    • You can easily access it through the Fn button Menu.

    Bulb Mode

    Bulb mode is great for shooting trails of light, such as fireworks, car lights, etc.

    bulb mode

    It’s best to use a remote or the Sony Playmemories remote app (that is downloadable for free) as you want to eliminate movement.

    • Firstly set the mode dial to M.
    • Connect your phone to the Sony RX100 V using WiFi or NFC.
    • Then:
    1. Dial exposure time to Bulb on the app.
    2. Dial in a suitable Aperture value from F/5.6.
    3. Press the shutter button on the app to start the exposure.
    4. Press the shutter button again on the app to stop the exposure.

    Conclusion

    The Sony RX100 IV brought many new software innovations to the RX line. Besides the ability to record in 4K and make High Frame rate movies, you shouldn’t overlook the many new focusing aides inside the Sony RX100 V like Eye AF and focus peaking. I hope you found my advanced manual for the RX100 V with tips and tricks useful. If you have any questions, I’d love to hear from you in the comment section below.

     

  • Sony RX100 II guide settings, tips and tricks

    Sony RX100 II guide settings, tips, and tricks

    Introduction

    Welcome to my Sony RX100 II advanced manual with tips and tricks.Although the differences between the Sony RX100 II and the original RX100 might look minor on paper, when it comes to features and performance, there are significant improvements. The best new feature is Wi-Fi support that enables you to transfer images to your smartphone as well as remotely control the camera. Sony also changed the sensor in the Mark 2 to a BSI model that promises to give less noise at higher ISO, increasing usability by about one stop. Other changes include a tilting screen (instead of a fixed one), improved battery life and an external Flash shoe (the only RX100 model to have this feature in fact) following Sony’s MIS standard.

    First things first:

    Are you looking for tips and settings for:

    Sony RX100 II tips and tricks

    Since the Sony RX100 II has the same menu layout as recently released Sony Alpha cameras, you’ll quickly find your way around if you already own one of those. I’ll be going over the entire Menu system, if you only want to check the best features, scroll down to right before the conclusion.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your camera, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp on the Sony RX100 II, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    MENU → Camera Settings → page 1

     

    Menu camera icon page 1

    Image size:

    The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

    Image size when the aspect ratio is 3:2:

    • L: 20 megapixels: 5472 × 3648 pixels for prints up to A3 size
    • M: 10M 3888 × 2592 pixels for prints up to A3 size
    • S: 5.0M 2736 × 1824 pixels for prints from 10×15 cm up to A4 size

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 16:9

    • L: 17 megapixels or 5472 × 3080 pixels
    • M: 7,5 megapixels or 3648 × 2056 pixels
    • S: 4.2 megapixels or 2720 × 1528 pixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 4:3

    • L: 18 megapixels or 4864 × 3648 pixels
    • M: 10 megapixels or 3648 × 2736 pixels
    • S: 5 megapixels or 2592 × 1944 pixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 1:1

    • L: 13 megapixels or 3648 × 3648 pixels
    • M: 6,5 megapixels or 2544 × 2544 pixels
    • S: 3.7 megapixels or 1920 × 1920 pixels

    Please note that when Quality is set to RAW or RAW & JPEG, the image size for RAW images is automatically set to L for optimal quality.

    If SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 16:9 (crop but a more broad view), 4:3 and 1:1. Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    Quality:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A RAW file saves all information the Sony RX100 II pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.
    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    panorama

    Panorama size

    (Only available when in panorama shooting mode)

    Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    You can make panoramas while scanning your camera up-down or left-right.So what is this all about? This might sound confusing at first, but this comes down to how you hold the A5000 when shooting panoramas: either in portrait or landscape orientation.

     

    MENU → Camera Settings → page 2

    Menu camera icon page 2

    Drive Mode

    You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.

    • Single Shooting (default setting): Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
    • Speed priority Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously at high speed while you press and hold down the shutter button. Focus and brightness settings of the first shot are used for the following shots.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image after 10 or 2 seconds. (selectable in sub menu) You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.
    • Self-portrait; selfie mode. Sets the self-timer to Self-portrait timer. When the Sony RX100 II detects the specified number of faces, a beep sounds, and the shutter operates 2 seconds later.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a specified number of images continuously after 10 seconds or 2 seconds (selectable in the sub menu).
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu.) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with a different color tone according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and the color filter.  (3 images with either LO small changes or Hi large changes).
    Flash Mode

    Flash off;

    obvious

    Autoflash:

    The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards a bright light.

    Fill-flash:

    The flash works every time you trigger the shutter with the Sony RX100 II.

    Slow sync:

    Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode actual does is first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.

    Rear Sync:

    Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’

    Focus Mode

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    AF-S:

    With a half-press of the shutter button, the Sony RX100 II will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.

    AF-C:

    The camera will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.

    DMF:

    The Sony RX100 II focuses on your subject and allows you to fine tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.

    MF:

    No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    Autofocus area

    You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘Multi’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use the center or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    Multi

    Focuses on a subject in all ranges of the finder frame automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway down in still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus. When the Face Detection function is active, AF operates with priority on faces!

    Center:

    Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.

    Flexible spot:

    Flexible spot area selects a spot anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center) . This is really the failsafe way of getting every shot in focus, although it is not the fastest way. Practice does make perfect.

    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using the Sony RX100 IImainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. I never use this.

    Smile/Face Detect.

    When the Face Detection function is used, the camera detects the faces of your subjects and adjusts the Autofocus Area, Flash Mode, Exposure Comp., White Balance and Red-Eye Reduction settings automatically. I always have this on when shooting portraits, it helps with faster and more accurate autofocus.

    When using Smile Shutter, the camera detects smiles and releases the shutter automatically.

    When the Sony RX100 II detects more than one subject, the camera will judge which is the main subject and set focus by priority. The frame for which the focus is set will turn green by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

    Auto Obj. Framing

    When enabled, the Sony RX100 II will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. A nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    MENU → Camera Settings → page 3

    Menu camera icon page 3

     

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the AutoISO range
    I have this range set between 100-800 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 800. If you’re a jpeg shooter (and use built-in Noise Reduction), you might think of using a higher top value (factory setting goes up to 6400).

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.
    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.
    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

     Flash compensation:

    Adjusts the amount of flash light. Separately to the exposure compensation, flash compensation changes the amount of flash light to change the exposure for the main subject within the range of the flash.

    White Balance

    You can either:

    • Auto (default setting): The product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
    • Daylight: The color tones are adjusted for the daylight. Shade: The color tones are adjusted for shadiness.
    • Shade: Adjusts for a shady location.
    • Cloudy: The color temperature is adjusted for a cloudy sky.
    • Incandescent: The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or under bright lightings, such as in a photo studio.
    • Fluor.: Warm White: The color temperature is adjusted for warm white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Cool White: The color temperature is adjusted for white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Day White: The color temperature is adjusted for neutral white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Daylight: The color temperature is adjusted for daylight fluorescent lighting.
    • Flash: The color temperature is adjusted for a flash.
    • Underwater Auto: The color temperature is adjusted for underwater shooting.
    • C.Temp./Filter: Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography.
    • Custom: Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].
    • Custom Setup: Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    • D-Range Optimizer: Auto (default setting): Corrects the brightness automatically.
    • D-Range Optimizer  Lv1 to D-Range Optimizer: Lv5: Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong)
    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the over exposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto (default setting): Corrects the exposure difference automatically. Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ―
    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV: Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimal level between 1.0 EV (weak) and 6.0 EV (strong). For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed of the following exposure levels; −1.0 EV, optimal exposure, and 1.0 EV
    Creative Style

    This menu setting allows you to select the desired image processing. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with [Creative Style], unlike with [Scene Selection] where the product adjusts the exposure.

    • Standard (default setting): For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Portrait: For shooting the skin color in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more.
    • Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.

    Contrast, Saturation, and Sharpness can be adjusted for each Creative Style item. Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.

    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony RX100 II, with all kinds of retro filters and effects.

    • Off (default setting): Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Soft Focus: Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
    • HDR Painting: Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    • Miniature: Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature models.
    • Watercolor: Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
    • Illustration: Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.

    MENU → Camera Settings → page 4

    Menu camera icon page 4

     

    Clear image zoom

    Clear Image Zoom allows you to enlarge the image with close to the original image quality when shooting still images. The Sony RX100 II zooms images with the original image quality first depending on the selected image size. When Clear Image Zoom is set to O, the camera automatically switches over to Clear Image Zoom when the zoom range without deterioration of the original image quality is exceeded.

    Digital zoom

    The camera can zoom over the scale that can be achieved using the optical zoom or Clear Image Zoom, although the quality of the resulting image will deteriorate. I prefer to crop images on my laptop afterward, that way I still have the choice.

    Long Exposure NR

    When you set the shutter speed to 1/3 second or longer (Long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the same duration that the shutter is open. This is to reduce the grainy noise typical in a long exposure.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would chance it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values)

    AF Illuminator:

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony RX100 II to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on.

    Steady Shot

    You can turn image stabilization ON or OFF here. Should be OFF for taking time-lapses with the app for example.

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range)RGB. If you don’t know what this means, leave it to standard.

    MENU → Camera Settings → page 5

    Menu camera icon page 5

    Shooting Tip list

    View all shooting advice on the screen when you use the Sony RX100 II.

    Write Date

    Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image.

    Scene Selection

    Scene Selection lets you select the scene type that is most like the environment you are shooting.
    Useful for: getting the benefits of auto mode in a known scene setting.
    Scene types include:

    • Portrait: Allows you to blur away backgrounds and sharpens the subject. Expresses skin tones softly.
    • Anti-motion blur: Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash to reduce subject blur.
    • Sports Action: Allows you to shoot a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The camera shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
    • Pet Allows you to shoot images of your pet with the best settings.
    • Gourmet: Allows you to shoot food arrangements in delicious and bright colors.
    • Macro: Allows you to shoot a flower and a small item from close up
    • Landscape: Allows you to shoot the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors
    • Sunset: Allows you to shoot the red of the sunset or sunrise beautifully.
    • Night Scene: Allows you to shoot night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere
    • Hand-held Twilight: Allows you to shoot night scenes with less noise without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.
    • Night Portrait: Allows you to shoot sharp images of people with a night view in the background.
    • Fireworks: Allows you to record fireworks in all their splendor.
    • High ISO sensitivity: Allows you to shoot images without a flash under low light conditions, reducing blur.
    Memory recall

    You can recall your saved settings in Memory (next item) by setting the mode dial (on top) to MR and pressing the arrows to select your Memory Recall number.

    Memory

    Allows you to register up to three often-used modes or camera settings in the Sony RX100 II. You can recall the settings using Memory recall. You can save settings like Aperture, Shutter Speed, EV, still and movie shooting menu items. You can recall these settings by setting the mode dial (on top) to MR and pressing the arrows to select your Memory Recall Number

    MENU → Film strip icon → page 1

    Menu film icon page 1

    File Format

    This is where you select what file format you want to use for video.

    These are your options:

    • AVCHD (default setting): Records HD movies in AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. You can create a Blu-ray Disc, an AVCHD recording disc, or a DVD-Video disc using the software PlayMemories Home. Audio is recorded in Dolby Digital
    • MP4: Records mp4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for WEB uploads, e-mail attachments, etc. Audio: AAC

    AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4. AVCHD is based on MP4 but is a much cleaner, much more advanced.

    Record setting

    Also for video functionality only on the Sony RX100 II. You can choose the quality of recorded video here.The larger the size of the movie image, the higher the image quality. And also the higher the amount of data used per second (average bit-rate), the higher the image quality.

    File Format: AVCHD
    • FX/FH: Movies shot are recorded in AVCHD format, at approximately 60 fields/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in interlaced mode, with Dolby Digital audio, AVCHD format.
    • PS: Movies shot are recorded in AVCHD format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compliant devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compliant devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, AVCHD format.
    File Format: MP4

    Movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or approximately 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with AAC audio, mp4 format.

    Image size (dual Rec)

    Sets the still image size shot while recording a movie.

    Steady Shot

    You can set the strength of the image stabilization here. Should be OFF for taking time-lapses and long exposures for example.

    • Active: Reduces camera shake when shooting images while walking or zoom shooting.
    • Standard: Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
    • Off
    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode.

    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    Movie

    You can select a shooting mode when the mode dial is set to Movie.

    • Program: The Sony RX100 II sets the exposure (shutter speed and aperture value) automatically, but you can set other settings and the settings will be retained.
    • Aperture priority: Allows you to set the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter priority: Allows you to set the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure: Allows you to set the exposure (shutter speed and aperture value) manually.

    MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 1

    Menu Wheel icon page 1

     

    Finder/LCD setting:

    When using an electronic viewfinder on the hot shoe, you can set the method for switching between the electronic viewfinder and screen.

    • Auto: Recognizes the position of eyes and switches the electronic viewfinder/screen automatically.
    • Manual: Switches the electronic viewfinder/screen by the button on the viewfinder.
    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash 2 times before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using the built in flash.

    Grid Line

    Having a grid line on your screen is a helpful aide for the composition of your image.
    The human brain is hard-wired to recognize the structure, and most people find a well-composed image more eye-pleasing.
    During photography history, rules have been developed on how to compose the different elements best within a scene. Many landscapes you’ll see have the horizon run through the middle of the image for instance, but this is just composition in its simplest form. Many photographers with a thorough understanding of these techniques go far beyond that.
    A good starting point is using the in-camera grid to make your brain aware of the possibilities in composition.
    The Rules of 3rds, Square and Diag square are available in the Sony RX100 II.

    Auto Review

    Select the amount of time the camera displays your image directly after capturing the image. 10, 5 and 2 sec is available, or you can turn this feature OFF if it annoys you.

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen of the Sony RX100 IIwhen you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no dips info and histogram.

    Peaking Level
    • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your Sony RX100 II set to MF or DMF.
    • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies; you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
    • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 2

    Menu Wheel icon page 2

    Control Ring

    Set the often-used functions to the Control Ring of the lens. Why not set it to aperture? This way the lens works like a Leica of Fujinon!

    Zoom Func. on Ring

    Sets the zooming method when the zoom function is assigned to the Control Ring. In the default setting, the zoom function is assigned to the Control Ring when shooting mode is set to Intelligent Auto or Superior Auto.

    • Standard: Zooms in/out smoothly using the Control Ring.
    • Step: Zooms in/out at fixed focal length steps, using the Control Ring. Fixed steps are 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 70 mm and 100 mm.
    Control Ring display

    Sets whether to display animation when operating the Control Ring.

    Function Button

    You can customize the seven functions assigned to the Fn button.

    Func. of center button

    Allows you to select frequently used functions and assign them to the center button on the control wheel. It’s a good idea to have this set to Focus magnifier, and have either the left or right button set to AF/MF toggle.

    Func. of left button

    Allows you to select frequently used functions and assign them to the left button.

    Func. of right button

    Allows you to select frequently used functions and assign them to the right button.

    MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 3

    Menu Wheel icon page 2

     

    Movie Button

    Allows you to set the mode to enable the MOVIE button.

    • Always: Movie recording starts, regardless of camera status.
    • Movie Mode Only: Movie recording starts only when the shooting mode is set to Movie.
    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    Face Priority tracking

    When the Sony RX100 II detects faces while using the tracking focus function, sets whether to give priority to a face.

    Face Registration

    This is where you can register faces on the Sony RX100 II; it works only when face recognition is set to ON (registered faces). This is an interesting functionality, as you can register faces of your subject (like at a wedding the bride and groom) and the camera will automatically detect these registered faces and give autofocus priority to them. You can register faces (by taking a picture of them within this menu) and set a priority order.
    Works well, and helps to get the right people in-focus in busy shots.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    Menu Playback icon page 1

    Send to smartphone

    Allows you to transfer images to display on a smartphone. Install the smartphone support application “PlayMemories Mobile” to your smartphone from the application store. If “PlayMemories Mobile” has already been installed on your smartphone, update it to the latest version.

    Connect to the Sony RX100 II from your smartphone, using the information that appears on the screen when the camera is ready to be connected. Connection methods differ, depending on the type of smartphone.

    Options for image size are the size in which the image was shot, 2M or VGA. You can select this in the Sony Playmemories app menu on your phone.

    You can select either:

    • Select on This Device: Select images on the Sony RX100 II to be transferred to the smartphone.
    • Select on Smartphone: Transfer all still images in a memory card to display on a smartphone.

    How to transfer images to an Android smartphone with one touch (NFC)

    1. You can connect the camera to an NFC smartphone with just one touch, without the need for complicated settings, and transfer images.
    2. Display a single image on the camera. You can use the NFC function only when (N Mark) is displayed on the screen.
    3. Touch the camera to the smartphone.
    4. The smartphone is connected to the camera, and “PlayMemories Mobile” is activated.
    5. The image being displayed on the camera is transferred to the smartphone!
    Send to computer

    You can easily backup images from the Sony RX100 II to a computer connected to your wireless access point or wireless broadband router.

    Install “PlayMemories Home” before registering the wireless access point.

    View on TV

    If the camera and TV are not connected using an HDMI cable, you can view images on a network enabled TV by transferring the image from the camera. You may need to set the TV beforehand, depending on the model.

    For details, see the instruction manual of the TV.

    Still/Movie Select

    Switches the display mode between still images and movies (View Mode).

    Delete

    Allows you to select unwanted images for deletion. You can also delete images using the Delete button

    Slide Show

    Plays back images automatically as a slideshow.

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    Menu Playback icon page 2

     

    Image Index

    Selects the number of images to be displayed on the index (grid when viewing images on your camera).

    Protect

    Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. You can select multiple images at one time.

    Specify Printing

    DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) is a function that allows you to specify the images of the memory card that you want to print out later

    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony RX100 II, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. You can also save it as a new file to your SD card when you have finished editing.

    Volume settings

    Change the playback volume in eight steps for recorded video or demos.

    Playback display

    Selects the orientation when playing back still images recorded in portrait orientation.

    MENU – SD card options – page 1

    Menu SD card icon page 1

     

    Format

    Format your SD card before use; this will erase any images still on the memory card.

    File Number

    Number your files according to the number of shots or reset it to start from 1.

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the camera will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for easily organizing events and locations.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to possibly retrieve lost images.

    Display card space

    Simply check the amount of free space on your SD card.

    MENU – clock options – page 1

    Menu clock icon page 1

    Date Time Setup

    Change date, time, date format and Daylight savings time

    Area setting

    Select your region, or change region when abroad, the camera will automatically change time and date for you.

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    Menu general settings icon page 1

     

    Menu gear icon page 1

    Menu start

    Allows you to select whether to always display the first screen of the menu or to display the screen of the item previously set

    Mode dial guide

    Sets whether to display the mode dial guide (description for each shooting mode)

    LCD brightness

    The brightness of the screen is automatically adjusted to the ambient lighting conditions using the light sensor. You can set the brightness of the screen manually.

    • Auto: Adjusts the brightness automatically.
    • Manual: Allows you to adjust the brightness within the range of -2 to 2.
    • Sunny Weather: Automatically adjusts the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.
    Viewfinder bright

    When using an electronic viewfinder, this sets the brightness of the electronic viewfinder.

    • Auto: Adjusts the brightness automatically.
    • Manual: Allows you to adjust the brightness within the range of -1 to 1.
    Power save

    Saves battery charge by having the camera automatically turn off sooner after a period of no operation.

    Max: Power Saving Start Time is set to 1 Minute. If the camera is not operated for a certain period of time, the screen goes dark.

    Standard: The setting of Power Saving Start Time is used.

    Power save start time

    Sets the length of time until the camera turns off automatically. If you do not operate the Sony RX100 II for a certain period of time while the power is on using the battery pack, the camera turns off automatically to prevent wearing down the battery pack (Auto power-off function).

    MENU – Setup – page 2

    Menu general settings icon page 1

    HDMI resolution

    Set the Resolution of images and video sent to your TV with an HDMI cable (1080p or 1080i).

    CTRL for HDMI

    With the “Control for HDMI” function, Sony BRAVIA Sync helps communicate with BRAVIA Sync-compatible equipment using HDMI CEC.

    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto: Depending on the computer or other USB devices you connect to the camera, the connection mode is automatically selected from [MTP] or [Mass Storage]. When you use Windows 7, [MTP] is selected and Windows 7-specific functions become available.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between the camera and a computer or other USB device.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between the camera and a computer or other USB device. When you use Windows 7, [MTP] is selected and Windows 7-specific functions become available. When you use other operating systems (Vista/XP, Mac OS X), the AutoPlay Wizard appears, and the still images in the recording folder on the camera are imported to the computer.
    USB LUN Setting
    • Sets the USB Connection mode when connecting the RX100 II to a computer, etc.
      Multi allows you to use the built-in Playmemories software for image transfer to your Computer.
    • Single should be used with any other device than a computer, for instance for charging.
    USB power supply

    Sets whether to use USB as the power supply when the Sony RX100 II is connected to a computer or USB device using the micro USB cable.

    Audio Signals

    You can turn off audio signals like the beep when te camera achieves focus. Useful if you want a more stealthy operation (although you’ll still hear the second curtain shutter).

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    Menu general settings icon page 1

    WPS Push

    If your access point has the WPS button, you can register the access point to the camera easily by pushing the WPS button. To use WPS Push, the security of your access point has to be set to WPA2 or WPA, and support the WPS push button system. In other cases, such as where security is set to WEP or the WPS push button system is not supported, register the access point manually.

    Access Point Settings

    You can also register your access point manually on the Sony RX100 II. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices.

    For details, see the instruction manual of the wireless access point.

    1. Go to Access Point Settings
    2. Select the access point you want to register.
    3. When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
    4. When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select Manual Setting and set the access point.
    5. If you select Manual Setting, input the SSID name of the access point and select the security system.
    6. Input the password OK Access points that do not display do not require a password to be entered.
    7. Select OK, then press c scroll wheel center button.
    Edit Device Name

    You can change the device name under Wi-Fi signals, Like Wim’s RX100M2 for instance.

    Disp Mac Address

    Displays the MAC address of the Sony RX100 II.

    SSID/PW Reset

    The camera shares the connection information for Send to Smartphon] and Ctrl with Smartphone with a device that has permission to connect.

    If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the camera, reset the connection information here.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    Menu general settings icon page 1Airplane Mode

    Like what you’d find on a Smartphone. Airplane mode turns OFF all Wifi signals and communication. It’s also a good way of saving battery power.

    Version

    Check the firmware version of the Sony RX100 II here.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Drop sensor

    Sets whether to use the protective function when you drop the Sony RX100 II. You’ll see a message on the screen saying “Drop detected” and the lens will retract. Internally, your sensor will be magnetically secured.

    Demo Mode

    You can set whether to use a demonstration of movie playback. When there is no need to view a demonstration, turn it Off.

    Initialize

    Initializes the settings to the default setting. Even if you execute this function, the images are not deleted.

    The most interesting Sony RX100 II settings

    I’ll quickly go over the ones that I find most useful:

    Face Detection & Smile Shutter

    Menu camera icon page 2

    Face detection

    • This is a valuable tool to increase AF accuracy and speed.
    • There is a general face recognition setting, which uses the RX100 II processor to detect any faces and a face registration feature, where it will give focus priority to faces you’ve previously registered.
    • There is also an option to record eight faces that will have priority when auto-focussing

    FUJINON XF100-400mmF4.5-5.6 R LM OIS WR sample image

    Face registration with registered faces works in 2 steps:

    Sony RX100 III

    1. first, you’ll have to take a clear picture of the face through the face recognition menu,
    2. after your the new face has been registered, you can set an order of priority for the maximum of 8 registered faces

    Smile Shutter

    Sony RX100 III

    • Smile shutter will automatically take a picture once a smile is detected.
    • Great for family or group shots.
    • Big, Slight and Normal smile presets are available, and there is even a bar graph on the screen that shows the detection level.

    Manual Focus Assist

    Menu Wheel icon page 2

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif Time
    • When set to ON, Magnification will automatically magnify a selectable (through the menu) part of you image when in Manual Focus Mode (MF).
    • Press on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position you want in other modes.
    • The duration of the magnification can also be set to either 2 sec, 5 sec or no limit in the menu Focus Magnification Time.

    Center AF

    Menu camera icon page 2

    Autofocus area

    You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘Multi’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use the center or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    Center:

    Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.

    FUJINON XF100-400mmF4.5-5.6 R LM OIS WR sample image

    Conclusion

    Besides outstanding image quality for a pocket camera, many of the advanced functionality of the Axxx and even A7 range have been incorporated in this little beast. You’ll soon get the hang of all the interesting functions with my Sony RX100 II advanced manual. I prefer it over the bigger RX10, as I find the one-inch sensor works better with this medium zoom lens. Some of the most interesting advanced features are Face recognition with Face detection, smile shutter, DMF with MF assist and the Center AF failsafe autofocus method. Take some time to go over all these and other functions of the Sony RX100 II and you’ll be on your way to taking great shots!

     

  • Sony RX100 guide settings, tips and tricks

     Sony RX100 guide settings, tips, and tricks

    Introduction

    If you’re looking for an advanced manual for the Sony RX100 with tips and tricks, you’ve come to the right place. I’ll be going over the entire menu system with you and along the way, we’ll find some hidden treasures there. Although it’s easy to set this camera to automatic, there are many interesting features tucked away in the menu system.

    Sony RX100 settings tips

    Since the Sony RX100 has the same menu layout as recently released Sony Alpha cameras, you’ll quickly find your way around if you already own one of those.

    First things first:

    Are you looking for tips and settings for:

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your camera, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 1

     

    Menu camera icon page 1

    Image size:

    The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

    Image size when the aspect ratio is 3:2:

    • L: 20 megapixels
    • M: 10 megapixels
    • S: 5.0 megapixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 16:9

    • L: 17 megapixels
    • M: 7,5 megapixels
    • S: 4.2 megapixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 4:3

    • L: 18 megapixels
    • M: 10 megapixels
    • S: 5 megapixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 1:1

    • L: 13 megapixels
    • M: 6,5 megapixels
    • S: 3.7 megapixels

    Please note that when Quality is set to RAW or RAW & JPEG, the image size for RAW images is automatically set to L for optimal quality.

    If SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 16:9 (crop but a more broad view), 4:3 and 1:1. Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    Quality:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.
    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    panorama

    Panorama size

    (Only available when in panorama shooting mode)

    Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    You can make panoramas while scanning your camera up-down or left-right.So what is this all about? This might sound confusing at first, but this comes down to how you hold the A5000 when shooting panoramas: either in portrait or landscape orientation.

     

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 2

    Menu camera icon page 2

    Drive Mode

    You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.

    • Single Shooting (default setting): Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
    • Speed priority Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously at high speed while you press and hold down the shutter button. Focus and brightness settings of the first shot are used for the following shots.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image after 10 or 2 seconds. (selectable in sub menu) You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.
    • Self-portrait; selfie mode. Sets the self-timer to Self-portrait timer. When the camera detects the specified number of faces, a beep sounds, and the shutter operates 2 seconds later.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a specified number of images continuously after 10 seconds or 2 seconds (selectable in the sub menu).
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu.) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with a different color tone according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and the color filter.  (3 images with either LO small changes or Hi large changes).
    Flash Mode

    Flash off;

    obvious

    Autoflash:

    The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards a bright light.

    Fill-flash:

    The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.

    Slow sync:

    Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode actual does is first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.

    Rear Sync:

    Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’

    Focus Mode

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    AF-S:

    With a half-press of the shutter button, the camera will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.

    AF-C:

    The camera will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.

    DMF:

    The Sony RX100 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.

    MF:

    No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    Autofocus area

    You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘Multi’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use the center or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    Multi

    Focuses on a subject in all ranges of the finder frame automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway down in still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus. When the Face Detection function is active, AF operates with priority on faces!

    Center:

    Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.

    Flexible spot:

    Flexible spot area selects a spot anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center) . This is really the failsafe way of getting every shot in focus, although it is not the fastest way. Practice does make perfect.

    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. I never use this.

    Smile/Face Detect.

    When the Face Detection function is used, the camera detects the faces of your subjects and adjusts the Autofocus Area, Flash Mode, Exposure Comp., White Balance and Red-Eye Reduction settings automatically. I always have this on when shooting portraits, it helps with faster and more accurate autofocus.

    When using Smile Shutter, the camera detects smiles and releases the shutter automatically.

    When the camera detects more than one subject, the camera will judge which is the main subject and set focus by priority. The frame for which the focus is set will turn green by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

    Auto Port. Framing

    When enabled, the Sony RX100 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. A nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 3

    Menu camera icon page 3

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the AutoISO range
    I have this range set between 100-800 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 800. If you’re a jpeg shooter (and use built-in Noise Reduction), you might think of using a higher top value (factory setting goes up to 6400).

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.
    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.
    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

     Flash compensation:

    Adjusts the amount of flash light. Separately to the exposure compensation, flash compensation changes the amount of flash light to change the exposure for the main subject within the range of the flash.

    White Balance

    You can either:

    • Auto (default setting): The product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
    • Daylight: The color tones are adjusted for the daylight. Shade: The color tones are adjusted for shadiness.
    • Shade: Adjusts for a shady location.
    • Cloudy: The color temperature is adjusted for a cloudy sky.
    • Incandescent: The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or under bright lightings, such as in a photo studio.
    • Fluor.: Warm White: The color temperature is adjusted for warm white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Cool White: The color temperature is adjusted for white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Day White: The color temperature is adjusted for neutral white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Daylight: The color temperature is adjusted for daylight fluorescent lighting.
    • Flash: The color temperature is adjusted for a flash.
    • Underwater Auto: The color temperature is adjusted for underwater shooting.
    • C.Temp./Filter: Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography.
    • Custom: Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].
    • Custom Setup: Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    • D-Range Optimizer: Auto (default setting): Corrects the brightness automatically.
    • D-Range Optimizer  Lv1 to D-Range Optimizer: Lv5: Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong)
    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the over exposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto (default setting): Corrects the exposure difference automatically. Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ―
    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV: Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimal level between 1.0 EV (weak) and 6.0 EV (strong). For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed of the following exposure levels; −1.0 EV, optimal exposure, and 1.0 EV
    Creative Style

    This menu setting allows you to select the desired image processing. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with [Creative Style], unlike with [Scene Selection] where the product adjusts the exposure.

    • Standard (default setting): For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Portrait: For shooting the skin color in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more.
    • Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.

    Contrast, Saturation, and Sharpness can be adjusted for each Creative Style item. Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.

    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects.

    • Off (default setting): Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Soft Focus: Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
    • HDR Painting: Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    • Miniature: Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature models.
    • Watercolor: Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
    • Illustration: Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.

     

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 4

    Menu camera icon page 4

    Clear image zoom

    Clear Image Zoom allows you to enlarge the image with close to the original image quality when shooting still images. The camera zooms images with the original image quality first depending on the selected image size. When Clear Image Zoom is set to O], the camera automatically switches over to Clear Image Zoom when the zoom range without deterioration of the original image quality is exceeded.

    Digital zoom

    The camera can zoom over the scale that can be achieved using the optical zoom or Clear Image Zoom, although the quality of the resulting image will deteriorate. I prefer to crop images on my laptop afterward, that way I still have the choice.

    Long Exposure NR

    When you set the shutter speed to 1/3 second or longer (Long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the same duration that the shutter is open. This is to reduce the grainy noise typical in a long exposure.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would chance it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values)

    AF Illuminator:

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the camera to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on.

    Steady Shot

    You can turn image stabilisation ON or OFF here. Should be OFF for taking time-lapses.

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range)RGB. If you don’t know what this means, leave it to standard.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 5

    Menu camera icon page 5

    Shooting Tip list

    View all shooting advice on the screen when you use the Sony RX100.

    Write Date

    Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image.

    Scene Selection

    Scene Selection lets you select the scene type that is most like the environment you are shooting.
    Useful for: getting the benefits of auto mode in a known scene setting.
    Scene types include:

    • Portrait: Allows you to blur away backgrounds and sharpens the subject. Expresses skin tones softly.
    • Anti-motion blur: Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash to reduce subject blur.
    • Sports Action: Allows you to shoot a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The camera shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
    • Pet Allows you to shoot images of your pet with the best settings.
    • Gourmet: Allows you to shoot food arrangements in delicious and bright colors.
    • Macro: Allows you to shoot a flower and a small item from close up
    • Landscape: Allows you to shoot the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors
    • Sunset: Allows you to shoot the red of the sunset or sunrise beautifully.
    • Night Scene: Allows you to shoot night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere
    • Hand-held Twilight: Allows you to shoot night scenes with less noise without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.
    • Night Portrait: Allows you to shoot sharp images of people with a night view in the background.
    • Fireworks: Allows you to record fireworks in all their splendor.
    • High ISO sensitivity: Allows you to shoot images without a flash under low light conditions, reducing blur.
    Memory recall

    You can recall your saved settings in Memory (next item) by setting the mode dial (on top) to MR and pressing the arrows to select your Memory Recall number.

    Memory

    Allows you to register up to three often-used modes or camera settings in the camera. You can recall the settings using Memory recall. You can save settings like Aperture, Shutter Speed, EV, still and movie shooting menu items. You can recall these settings by setting the mode dial (on top) to MR and pressing the arrows to select your Memory Recall Number

    MENU – Film strip icon – page 1

    Menu film icon page 2

    File Format

    This is where you select what file format you want to use for video.

    These are your options:

    • AVCHD (default setting): Records HD movies in AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. You can create a Blu-ray Disc, an AVCHD recording disc, or a DVD-Video disc using the software PlayMemories Home. Audio is recorded in Dolby Digital
    • MP4: Records mp4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for WEB uploads, e-mail attachments, etc. Audio: AAC

    AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4. AVCHD is based on MP4 but is a much cleaner, much more advanced.

    Record setting

    Also for video functionality only. You can choose the quality of recorded video here.The larger the size of the movie image, the higher the image quality. And also the higher the amount of data used per second (average bit-rate), the higher the image quality.

    File Format: AVCHD
    • FX/FH: Movies shot are recorded in AVCHD format, at approximately 60 fields/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in interlaced mode, with Dolby Digital audio, AVCHD format.
    • PS: Movies shot are recorded in AVCHD format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compliant devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compliant devices), in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, AVCHD format.
    File Format: MP4

    Movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or approximately 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with AAC audio, mp4 format.

    Image size (dual Rec)

    Sets the still image size shot while recording a movie.

    Steady Shot

    You can set the strength of the image stabilization here. Should be OFF for taking time-lapses and long exposures for example.

    • Active: Reduces camera shake when shooting images while walking or zoom shooting.
    • Standard: Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
    • Off
    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode.

    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    Movie

    You can select a shooting mode when the mode dial is set to Movie.

    • Program: The camera sets the exposure (shutter speed and aperture value) automatically, but you can set other settings and the settings will be retained.
    • Aperture priority: Allows you to set the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter priority: Allows you to set the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure: Allows you to set the exposure (shutter speed and aperture value) manually.

    MENU – Custom settings (wheel) – page 1

    Menu Wheel icon page 1

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash 2 times before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using the built in flash.

    Grid Line

    Having a grid line on your screen is a helpful aide for the composition of your image.
    The human brain is hard-wired to recognize the structure, and most people find a well-composed image more eye-pleasing.
    During photography history, rules have been developed on how to compose the different elements best within a scene. Many landscapes you’ll see have the horizon run through the middle of the image for instance, but this is merely composition in its simplest form. Many photographers with a thorough understanding of these techniques go far beyond that.
    A good starting point is using the in-camera grid to make your brain aware of the possibilities in composition.
    The Rules of 3rds, Square and Diag square are available in the Sony RX100.

    Auto Review

    Select the amount of time the camera displays your image directly after capturing the image. 10, 5 and 2 sec is available, or you can turn this feature OFF if it annoys you.

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info; no dips info and histogram.

    Peaking Level
    • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.
    • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies; you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
    • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU – Custom settings (wheel) – page 2

    MenuWheel icon page 2

    Control Ring

    Set the often-used functions to the Control Ring of the lens. Why not set it to aperture? This way the lens works like a Leica of Fujinon!

    Control Ring display

    Sets whether to display animation when operating the Control Ring.

    Function Button

    You can customize the seven functions assigned to the Fn button.

    Func. of center button

    Allows you to select frequently used functions and assign them to the center button on the control wheel. It’s a good idea to have this set to Focus magnifier, and have either the left or right button set to AF/MF toggle.

    Func. of left button

    Allows you to select frequently used functions and assign them to the left button.

    Func. of right button

    Allows you to select frequently used functions and assign them to the right button.

    MENU – Custom settings (wheel) – page 3

    Menu Wheel icon page 3

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    Face Priority tracking

    When the camera detects faces while using the tracking focus function, sets whether to give priority to a face.

    Face Registration

    This is where you can register faces; it works only when face recognition is set to ON (registered faces). This is an interesting functionality, as you can register faces of your subject (like at a wedding the bride and groom) and the camera will automatically detect these registered faces and give autofocus priority to them. You can register faces (by taking a picture of them within this menu) and set a priority order.
    Works well, and helps to get the right people in-focus in busy shots.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    Menu Playback icon page 1

    Still/Movie Select

    Switches the display mode between still images and movies (View Mode).

    Delete

    Allows you to select unwanted images for deletion. You can also delete images using the Delete button

    Slide Show

    Plays back images automatically as a slideshow.

    Image Index

    Selects the number of images to be displayed on the index (grid when viewing images on your camera).

    3D Viewing

    Connects to a 3D compatible TV and allows you to view 3D images shot on other cameras. Connect the camera and the 3D TV using an HDMI Cable.

    Protect

    Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. You can select multiple images at one time.

    Specify Printing

    DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) is a function that allows you to specify the images of the memory card that you want to print out later

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    Menu Playback icon page 2

    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. You can also save it as a new file to your SD card when you have finished editing.

    picture effect

    Volume settings

    Change the playback volume in eight steps for recorded video or demos.

    Playback display

    Selects the orientation when playing back still images recorded in portrait orientation.

    MENU – SD card options – page 1

    Menu Playback icon page 1

    Format

    Format your SD card before use; this will erase any images still on the memory card.

    File Number

    Number your files according to the number of shots or reset it to start from 1.

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the camera will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for easily organizing events and locations.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to possibly retrieve lost images.

    Display card space

    Simply check the amount of free space on your SD card.

    MENU – clock options – page 1

    Menu clock icon page 1

    Date Time Setup

    Change date, time, date format and Daylight savings time

    Area setting

    Select your region, or change region when abroad, the camera will automatically change time and date for you.

    MENU – Setup – page 1

     

    Menu gear icon page 1

    Menu start

    Allows you to select whether to always display the first screen of the menu or to display the screen of the item previously set

    Mode dial guide

    Sets whether to display the mode dial guide (description for each shooting mode)

    LCD brightness

    The brightness of the screen is automatically adjusted to the ambient lighting conditions using the light sensor. You can set the brightness of the screen manually.

    • Auto: Adjusts the brightness automatically.
    • Manual: Allows you to adjust the brightness within the range of -2 to 2.
    • Sunny Weather: Automatically adjusts the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.

    sunny weather

    Power saving start time

    Selects the time it takes for the camera to go into sleep mode if you don’t use it.

    HDMI resolution

    Set the Resolution of images and video sent to your TV with an HDMI cable (1080p or 1080i).

    CTRL for HDMI

    With the “Control for HDMI” function, Sony BRAVIA Sync helps communicate with BRAVIA Sync-compatible equipment using HDMI CEC.

    MENU – Setup – page 2

    Menu gear icon page 2

    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto: Depending on the computer or other USB devices you connect to the camera, the connection mode is automatically selected from [MTP] or [Mass Storage]. When you use Windows 7, [MTP] is selected and Windows 7-specific functions become available.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between the camera and a computer or other USB device.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between the camera and a computer or other USB device. When you use Windows 7, [MTP] is selected and Windows 7-specific functions become available. When you use other operating systems (Vista/XP, Mac OS X), the AutoPlay Wizard appears, and the still images in the recording folder on the camera are imported to the computer.
    USB LUN Setting
    • Sets the USB Connection mode when connecting the RX100 to a computer, etc.
      Multi allows you to use the built-in Playmemories software for image transfer to your Computer.
    • Single should be used with any other device than a computer, for instance for charging.
    USB power supply

    Sets whether to use USB as the power supply when the camera is connected to a computer or USB device using the micro USB cable.

    Audio Signals

    You can turn off audio signals like the beep when te camera achieves focus. Useful if you want a more stealthy operation (although you’ll still hear the second curtain shutter).

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    Menu gear icon page 3

    Version

    Check the firmware version of the Sony RX100 here.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Drop sensor

    Sets whether to use the protective function when you drop the camera. You’ll see a message on the screen saying “Drop detected” and the lens will retract. Internally, your sensor will be magnetically secured.

    Demo Mode

    You can set whether to use a demonstration of movie playback. When there is no need to view a demonstration, turn it Off.

    Initialize

    Initializes the settings to the default setting. Even if you execute this function, the images are not deleted.

    The most interesting Sony RX100 settings

    I’ll quickly go over the ones that I find most useful:

    Face Detection & Smile Shutter

    Menu camera icon page 2

    Face detection

    • This is a valuable tool to increase AF accuracy and speed.
    • There is a general face recognition setting, which uses the RX100 processor to detect any faces and a face registration feature, where it will give focus priority to faces you’ve previously registered.
    • There is also an option to record eight faces that will have priority when auto-focussing

    FUJINON XF100-400mmF4.5-5.6 R LM OIS WR sample image

    Face registration with registered faces works in 2 steps:

    Sony RX100 III

    1. first, you’ll have to take a clear picture of the face through the face recognition menu,
    2. after your the new face has been registered, you can set an order of priority for the maximum of 8 registered faces

     

    Smile Shutter

    Sony RX100 III

    • Smile shutter will automatically take a picture once a smile is detected.
    • Great for family or group shots.
    • Big, Slight and Normal smile presets are available, and there is even a bar graph on the screen that shows the detection level.

     

    Manual Focus Assist

    Menu Wheel icon page 3

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif Time
    • When set to ON, Magnification will automatically magnify a selectable (through the menu) part of you image when in Manual Focus Mode (MF).
    • Press on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position you want in other modes.
    • The duration of the magnification can also be set to either 2 sec, 5 sec or no limit in the menu Focus Magnification Time.

    Center AF

    Menu camera icon page 2

    Autofocus area

    You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘Multi’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use the center or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    Center:

    Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.

    FUJINON XF100-400mmF4.5-5.6 R LM OIS WR sample image

    Conclusion

    Besides outstanding image quality for a pocket camera, many of the advanced functionality of the Axxx and even A7 range have been incorporated in this little beast.  The Sony RX100 is packed full of interesting functions for you to discover, making it a very useful pocket camera. I prefer it over the bigger RX10, as I find the one-inch sensor works better with this medium zoom lens. Some of the most interesting advanced features are Face recognition with Face detection, smile shutter, DMF with MF assist and the Center AF failsafe autofocus method. Take some time to go over all these and other functions of the Sony RX100 and you’ll be on your way to taking great shots!

     

  • Sony A5000: settings, tips and tricks

    Sony A5000: settings, tips and tricks

    Sony A5000: settings, tips and tricks

    Introduction

    Welcome to my Sony A5000 manual with tips and tricks.The Sony A5000 has a 20MP APS-C sensor and contrast detection autofocus system. Although this camera is relatively easy to use, for a beginner it is still very customizable, and this might seem daunting at first.

    No worries, I’ve assembled a guide to the essential functions of the Sony A5000, including some tips and tricks.

    First things fist: setting up your camera for your use and getting to know the MENU system.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your camera, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 1)

    Camera Settings → page 1

    Shoot Mode:
    • Intelligent Auto (i)
      The Intelligent Auto mode will automatically detect the type of scene you are shooting and adjust accordingly. Once detected, an icon for the recognized scene will appear in the top right-hand corner of the screen.
      Useful for: all-around shooting when you want to simply snap off some photos, with less emphasis on composing a specifically desired shot.
    • Superior Auto (i+)
      Superior Auto goes beyond scene type detection, including composite layering for higher dynamic range. Available only when shooting JPEG only.
      Useful for: Similar situation as Intelligent Auto, but when the scenes you are shooting include a wide range of exposure, such as shooting into or out of the shadow.
    • Program Auto (P)
      In Program, the camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture, leaving the exposure adjustments left to you.
      Useful for: intentionally creating under or overexposed photos.
    • Aperture Priority (A)
      Aperture Priority gives you manual control of the aperture of your camera while automatically setting shutter speed and exposure. Adjusting the aperture gives you control of how much of your shot is in (or out of) focus.
      Useful for: controlling the depth of field of your photos, to either isolate your subject by blurring more of the shot, keeping more of the frame in focus.
    • Shutter Priority (S)
      Shutter Priority automatically locks in the exposure and aperture for you, and you manually control the shutter speed. This is a great creative tool to either add or subtract movement from your shots by using slower or higher shutter speeds, respectively.
      Useful for: when you want to add or remove motion in your photos by slowing or speeding up the shutter speed.
    • Manual Exposure (M)
      Manual Exposure puts you in control of all three of the main adjustments: shutter speed, aperture, and ISO. Auto ISO can be used in Manual mode.
      Useful for: control freaks. Or simply in situations when you know better than (the automatic adjustments made by) your camera.
    • Movie (film icon)
      Although capturing video is available in any mode using the MOVIE button to begin recording, setting the camera to Movie mode makes changing video record settings easier. There are four shooting modes within video mode. In Movie mode, press the Select button to switch between:

      • Program Auto automatically selects shutter speed and aperture, leaving the exposure adjustment to you.
      • Aperture Priority gives you control of aperture while setting exposure and shutter speed automatically.
      • Shutter Priority, as you might expect, adjusts exposure and aperture, leaving you to adjust shutter speed.
      • Manual Exposure, finally, gives you control of all three: exposure, aperture, and shutter speed.
    • Sweep Panorama (pinched-in rectangle icon)
      Sweep Panorama is a built-in panoramic photo creation mode. With Sweep Panorama shooting mode selected, press the shutter button, then slowly rotate the camera to the right. The camera will take multiple photos and stitch them together into a single, ultra-wide panoramic photo.
      Useful for: Capturing more than what a single frame can offer.
    • Scene Selection (SCN)
      Scene Selection lets you select the scene type that is most like the environment you are shooting.
      Useful for: getting the benefits of auto mode in a known scene setting.
      Scene types include:

      • Portrait
      • Sports Action
      • Macro
      • Landscape
      • Sunset
      • Night Scene
      • Hand-held Twilight
      • Night Portrait
      • Anti-Motion Blur
    Image size:

    The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

    Image size when the aspect ratio is 3:2:

    • L: 20 megapixels or 6000×4000 pixels
    • M: 12 megapixels or 4240×2832 pixels
    • S: 6.0 megapixels or 3008×2000 pixels

    Image size when Aspect Ratio is 16:9

    • L: 20 megapixels or 6000×3376 pixels
    • M: 10megapixels or 4240×2400 pixels
    • S: 5.1megapixels or 3008×1688 pixels

    Please note that when Quality is set to RAW or RAW & JPEG, the image size for RAW images is automatically set to L for optimal quality.

    If SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface) or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    Quality:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.
    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    Panorama size

    (Only available when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    You can make panoramas while scanning your camera up-down or left-right.So what is this all about? This might sound confusing at first, but this comes down to how you hold the A5000 when shooting panoramas: either in portrait or landscape orientation.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 2)

    Camera Settings → page 2

    File Format

    This is where you select what file format you want to use for video.

    These are your options:

    • AVCHD (default setting): Records HD movies in AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. You can create a Blu-ray Disc, an AVCHD recording disc, or a DVD-Video disc using the software PlayMemories Home. Audio is recorded in Dolby Digital
    • MP4: Records mp4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for WEB uploads, e-mail attachments, etc. Audio: AAC

    AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4. AVCHD is based on MP4 but is a much cleaner, much more advanced.

    Record setting

    Also for video functionality only. You can choose the quality of recorded video here. You can change the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bitrate, the higher the image quality. If you’re not familiar with this, leave as is.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD:

    • 60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices). Also in interlaced mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices). Also in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices). Also in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.

    When  File Format is set to MP4:

    • Movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60icompatible devices) or about 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with AAC audio, mp4 format.

    Menu items details:

    When  File Format is set to AVCHD:

    • 60i 24M(FX)*: 50i 24M(FX)**: Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
    • 60i 17M(FH) (default setting)*: 50i 17M(FH) (default setting)**: Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i). Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)
    • 60p 28M(PS)*:
    • 50p 28M(PS)**: Records the highest image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p). Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Max.)
    • 24p 24M(FX)*: 25p 24M(FX)**: Records high image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (Max.)
    • 24p 17M(FH)*: 25p 17M(FH)**: Records standard image quality movies of 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinemalike atmosphere. Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)

    When [ File Format] is set to MP4:

    • 1440×1080 12M (default setting): Records movies of 1440 × 1080. Bit-rate: Approx. 12 Mbps (Avg.)
    • VGA 3M: Records movies of VGA size. Bit-rate: Approx. 3 Mbps (Avg.) *
    • Notes:* 1080 60i (NTSC) compatible device,  ** 1080 50i (PAL) compatible device

    General notes:

    • 60p/50p movies can be played back only on compatible devices.
    • Movies recorded with the [60p 28M(PS)]/[50p 28M(PS)]/[60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)]/ [24p 24M(FX)] /[25p 24M(FX)] setting in [ Record Setting] are converted by PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording disc. This conversion can take a long time. Also, you cannot create a disc in the original image quality. If you want to keep the original image quality, store your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.
    • To play back 24p/25p movies on a TV, the TV must be compatible with the 24p/25p formats. If the TV is not compatible with the 24p/25p format, 24p/25p movies will be output as 60i/50i movies.
    • You cannot create discs with movies recorded with MP4 recording settings using PlayMemories Home.
    Drive Mode

    You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.

    • Single Shooting (default setting): Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button. Hi: takes about six images per second, Lo about 3
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image after 10 or 2 seconds. (selectable in submenu) You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a specified number of images continuously after 10 seconds or 2 seconds (selectable in the submenu).
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the submenu.) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the submenu) For processing as HDR on your PC.
    • WB Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with a different color tone according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and the color filter.  (3 images with either LO small changes or Hi large changes)
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.

    Flash Mode

    Flash off;

    obvious

    Autoflash:

    The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards a bright light.

    Fill-flash:

    The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.

    fill flash

    Slow sync:

    Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode actual does is first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.

    Rear Sync:

    Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’

     Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image.

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 3)

    Camera Settings → page 3

    Focus Mode

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    AF-S:

    With a half-press of the shutter button, the camera will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.

    AF-A:

    AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard setting and the easiest to use.

    AF-C:

    The camera will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.

    DMF:

    The ILCE-5100 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.

    MF:

    No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    Focus area

    The Sony A5000 sensor has a contrast detection autofocus system with 25 points. This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in a compact camera and is even better than some AF systems in cameras that cost over three times as much. You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘wide’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    Wide:

    Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.

    Zone:

    Zone allows you to select one of 9 predefined zones where autofocus will be active. These zones each cover about 25% of the screen, with a slight overlap. You can quickly change the zone by pressing the multi-controller button and navigating to any of the other zones.

    Center:

    Focuses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.

    Flexible spot:

    Flexible spot area selects a spot anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center)  You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when set to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)

    Lock-on AF:

    When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor to [Lock-on AF] on the [Focus Area] setting screen, then select the desired tracking start area using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area to be the flexible spot. On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the AF range finder frame by rotating the control wheel.

    AF Illuminator:

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the camera to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on.

    Exposure Comp

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the AutoISO range
    I have this range set between 100-1600 as this range is virtually noise-free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 1600. If you’re a jpeg shooter (and use built-in Noise Reduction), you might think of using a higher top value (factory setting goes up to 6400).

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.
    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.
    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 4)

    Camera Settings → page 4

    White Balance

    You can either:

    • Auto (default setting): The product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
    • Daylight: The color tones are adjusted for the daylight. Shade: The color tones are adjusted for shadiness.
    • Cloudy: The color temperature is adjusted for a cloudy sky. Incandescent: The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or under bright lighting, such as in a photo studio.
    • Fluor.: Warm White: The color temperature is adjusted for warm white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Cool White: The color temperature is adjusted for white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Day White: The color temperature is adjusted for neutral white fluorescent lighting.
    • Fluor.: Daylight: The color temperature is adjusted for daylight fluorescent lighting.
    • Flash: The color temperature is adjusted for a flash.
    • Underwater Auto: The color temperature is adjusted for underwater shooting.
    • C.Temp./Filter: Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography.
    • Custom: Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].
    • Custom Setup: Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
    DRO/Auto HDR

    HDR

    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimize and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    • D-Range Optimizer: Auto (default setting): Corrects the brightness automatically.
    • D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5: Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong)
    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto (default setting): Corrects the exposure difference automatically. Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ―
    • Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV: Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimal level between 1.0 EV (weak) and 6.0 EV (strong). For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed of the following exposure levels; −1.0 EV, optimal exposure, and +1.0 EV
    Creative Style

    This menu setting allows you to select the desired image processing. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you like with [Creative Style], unlike with [Scene Selection] where the product adjusts the exposure.

    • Standard (default setting): For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Portrait: For shooting the skin color in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more.
    • Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

    Contrast, Saturation, and Sharpness can be adjusted for each Creative Style item. Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    onone perfect photo suite 8

    • Off (default setting): Disables the Picture Effect function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Soft Focus: Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
    • HDR Painting: Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    • Miniature: Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature models.
    • Watercolor: Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
    • Illustration: Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.
    Focus Magnifier

    When focusing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the camera to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 5)

    Camera Settings → page 5

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values)

    Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the camera is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    Smile/Face Detect

    This is another powerful feature. It can be set to automatically detect on focus on (registered) faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the camera will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool, along with the pivoting screen.

    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)

    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony A5000 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nice composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    (MENU → Camera Settings → page 6)

     Camera Settings → page 6
    Steady Shot

    You can turn the lens image stabilization ON or OFF here. Should be OFF for taking time-lapses with the app for example.

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range)RGB. If you don’t know what this means, leave it to standard.

    Auto Slow Shutter (movie mode)

    Sets whether to adjust the shutter speed automatically during video recording in case if the subject is dark/ Set to ON.

    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode.

    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording. O

    Shooting Tip list

    View all shooting advice on screen when you use the A5000

    (MENU → Custom settings (wheel) → page 1)

    Custom settings Wheel → page 1

    Zebra

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the full picture. As I capture in RAW, I am very careful not to have any highlight clipping, to be able to recover highlights in Lightroom possibly entirely.

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier on Page 5 of the camera settings. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    Grid Line

    Having a grid line on your screen is a helpful aid for the composition of your image.
    The human brain is hard-wired to recognize the structure, and most people find a well-composed image more eye-pleasing.
    During photography history, rules have been developed on how to compose the different elements best within a scene. Many landscapes you’ll see have the horizon run through the middle of the image for instance, but this is merely composition in its simplest form. Many photographers with a thorough understanding of these techniques go far beyond that.
    A good starting point is using the in-camera grid to make your brain aware of the possibilities in composition.
    The Rules of 3rds, Square and Diag +square are available in the Sony Alpha ILCE-5100.

    Marker settings

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
    • Off (default setting) / On Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. Off (default setting) / 4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 / 1.85:1 / 2.35:1
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. Off (default setting) / 80% / 90%
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground. Off (default setting) / On
    Auto Review

    Select the amount of time the camera displays your image directly after capturing the image. 10, 5 and 2 sec is available, or you can turn this feature OFF if it annoys you.

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info; no dips info and histogram.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 2

    Custom settings Wheel → page 2

    Peaking Level
    • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid that works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.
    • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies; you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
    • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    Exposure set guide

    Sets the guide displayed when exposure settings are changed in the shooting screen.  Excellent tool when you’re getting to know the functionality of your new camera. If you’re familiar with Sony’s feature, turn it OFF.

    Live view Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier auto-focussing in low-light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.

    Pre AF

    When pre-AF is set to ON, the camera will continuously focus, even without half-pressing the shutter button. This can be draining to the battery, especially when using some lenses like the Zeiss Touit range. Set it to OFF.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 3

    Custom settings Wheel → page 1

    Zoom settings

    Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens. If you set this to digital zoom, the camera will be basically cropping pixels out.

    Release without lens

    Makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the camera. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)

    AEL with shutter

    Selects whether to fix exposure automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that the subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is canceled.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.
    Self-portrait timer

    You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.

    1.  Tilt the LCD screen 180° upward, and then point the lens at yourself.
    2. Press the shutter button. The product starts the self-timer shooting after three seconds. Hint If you want to use another Drive Mode than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set [Selfportrait/ -timer] to [Off], then tilt the monitor upward approx. 180 degrees.
    3. Hint If you want to use another Drive Mode than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set Self-portrait/ -timer to Off, then tilt the monitor upward approx. 180 degrees.
    S Auto Img Extract

    When in Superior Auto, the camera often takes multiple images and combines them into one (jpeg only). You can either save all images captured (OFF) or only the combined image (ON). Turn it OFF, I’ve tried this functionality, and the combined image feature does not work well.

    Face Registration

    This is where you can register faces; it works only when face recognition is set to ON (registered faces). This is an interesting functionality, as you can register faces of your subject (like at a wedding the bride and groom) and the camera will automatically detect these registered faces and give autofocus priority to them. You can register up to 8 faces (by taking a picture of them within this menu) and set a priority order.
    Works well, and helps to get the right people in-focus in busy shots.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 4

    Custom settings Wheel → page 4
    Custom keys setting

    Assigning functions to the various keys allows you to speed up operations by pressing the appropriate key when the shooting information screen is displayed.

    Movie button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE button.

    • Always (default setting): Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
    • Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to Movie mode.
    AF micro adjustment

    This is only necessary when using a Sony adapter (like the LAEA4) with supported A-mount lenses. These lenses can auto-focus slightly off, and some micro adjustment can help getting the focus just right.

    Lens Comp

    Lens compensation corrects certain lens issues like shading, chromatic aberrations, and distortion. If you shoot jpeg, it’s advisable to set them all to auto (works only with supported lenses), in RAW, turn them all OFF as you’ll probably want to take care of these lens-related problems using a RAW editor on your desktop or laptop.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 1

    Wireless functionality - page 1

    Send To Smartphone
    • You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
    • You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or on the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
    • You’ll have to connect the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A5000 screen.
    • It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
    • You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
    • When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to physically connect the computer to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can view images and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

    One Touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.

    I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC) but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    WPS Push

    If your access point has the WPS button, you can register the access point to the camera easily by pushing the WPS button.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 2

    Wireless functionality - page 2

    Access Point Set

    Here you can setup an access point for your camera to the internet.

    It enables the Sony ILCE-5100 to install PlayMemories apps from the internet directly. Works just like setting an access point (WiFi connection) on your phone.

    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6000 is yours in certain situations.

    Disp MAC address

    You can see the MAC address of the camera here, might be useful for some advanced configuration or troubleshooting

    SSID, password reset

    Reset the name and password of the wireless network the camera creates.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.
    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – Playmemories settings- page 1

    Playmemories settings- page 1

    Application List

    You’ll find The Smart remote control camera app (which allows you to use your phone as a remote control via PlayMemories phone app for iPhone and Android) and the Playmemories Camera app here.

    You can access your online PlayMemories account here, or create an account (once you’ve set up your camera connection with your Wifi network).

    Bulb Exposure with the Sony A5100 and A7s

    You’ll also be able to download new apps available for purchase in the Sony Playmemories online app store like the Time-lapse and smooth reflection app.

    If you do not want to connect your camera to the internet, you can always install new apps (and updates) if you connect the camera to your Mac or PC with the supplied USB cable, using the Sony PlayMemories desktop application.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    playback options - page 1

    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD card.

    View Mode

    Select how the camera will arrange captured images in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Select whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to automatically rotate images when you rotate the camera or not.

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    playback options - page 2

    Enlarge

    Select an image and enlarge a portion of that image. Useful for checking details and focus.

    4K Still Image PB

    Outputs still images in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    Protect

    Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    Setup - page 1

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Monitor Brightness

    Set to Auto which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting. There are color and greyscale charts displayed on the screen to allow you to set it up to your liking.

    Volume settings

    Change the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    Audio Signals

    You can turn off audio signals like the beep when the camera achieves focus. Useful if you want a more stealthy operation (although you’ll still hear the second curtain shutter).

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a direct tab style menu layout

    Delete Confirm

    When deleting images on your SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion (to make sure you don’t accidentally delete anything). You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.

    MENU – Setup – page 2

    Setup - page 2

    Pwr Save Start time

    Selects the time it takes for the camera to go into sleep mode if you don’t use it.

    PAL/NTSC mode

    change to either of this broadcasting standards according to which region of the world you live in

    Remote CTRl

    When the Sony A5000 is connected via USB to a PC, you can use the Remote Camera Control (RCC) software to take pictures or change settings on the camera from the computer. ( Both Mac and PC versions downloadable via the Sony website). If you would like to do so, you’ll need to turn this ON here. There is now a special version of Capture One available (free) for Sony cameras which also has this functionality.

    HDMI Resolution

    Set the Resolution of images and video sent to your TV with an HDMI cable (1080p or 1080i)

    CTRL for HDMI

    With the “Control for HDMI” function, Sony BRAVIA Sync helps communicate with BRAVIA Sync-compatible equipment using HDMI CEC.

    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    MENU – Setup – page 3

     Setup - page 3
    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.
    Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    Language

    Set your preferred language. The advantage of setting it to Eglish is that you’ll find much more information online when you need any troubleshooting.

    Date Time Setup

    Change date, time, date format and Daylight savings time

    Area setting

    Select your region, or change region when abroad, the camera will automatically change time and date for you.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    Setup - page 4

    Format

    Format your SD card before use; this will erase any images still on the memory card.

    File Number

    Number your files according to number of shots or reset it to start from 1

    Select REC folder

    Selects where the camera will store newly captured images

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for easily organizing events and locations

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to possibly retrieve lost images.

    MENU – Setup – page 5

    Setup - page 5

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and lens are running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

    The Next Chapter is about the different Shooting Modes Available, another concept that is necessary to understand fully.

    The A5000 camera includes all the usual shooting modes plus some useful additions, although they are not accessible via the usual dial on top.

    To switch between shooting modes, press the select button in the middle of the control wheel at the back of your camera when the camera is turned on. Then use the scroll wheel to select a mode and press the Select button to switch to that mode.

    shooting modes available via the select button ( or via MENU → Camera Settings → Shoot Mode→ desired setting)

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appear on the top right hand of the screen.
    These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.
    The Sony A5000 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).

    Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.
    Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).

    Superior Auto:

    Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing.

    This includes composite layering (layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures) and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image.

    You can either choose whether you want the camera to save all images captured or just the composite image, by selecting S. Auto Img. Extract in the MENU system.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is (like in iAuto) fixed and only usable for jpeg shooting.

    P (Program Auto):

    Program (P) mode automatically adjusts exposure and aperture according to your desired setting.
    See this as a more advanced iAuto mode.
    tip: lower the automatic ISO range to 100-1600 for better image quality (ISO-Auto range in MENU SYSTEM)

    A (Aperture Priority):

    Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot, for example when you want to blur the background (large aperture like f/1.8), or want a sharp corner-to-corner image (around f/5.6-f/8).

    The aperture value can be changed during movie recording, a technique that will be familiar to videographers.
    Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred (what is called Bokeh).
    Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
    If proper exposure cannot be set, the shutter speed on the shooting screen blinks.

    S (Shutter Priority):

    The go-to mode if you cant to shoot fast-moving subjects, by manually adjusting the shutter speed. You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of the movement with a high-speed shutter, or as a trailing image with a low-speed shutter. The shutter speed can be changed while recording movies. The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

    If proper exposure cannot be obtained, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks.

    • Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.
    • The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.
    • When the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer, noise reduction will be applied (Long Exposure noise reduction in the Menu ON/OFF) after shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open. This will temporarily freeze your camera, and you want to be able to capture images while noise reduction is in progress.
    • The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot (there is no Live view on Sony cameras for long exposures).

    M (Manual Exposure):

    Both shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed in this mode, also during movie recording.

    Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed or aperture value, then turn the control wheel to select a value.
    When ISO Auto is used, the ISO value automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.

    • If the aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not suitable for appropriate exposure, the ISO value indicator will blink.
    • When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
    • The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
    • The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot.
    Bulb Mode in Manual exposure

    Bulb is the mode used to shoot a trailing image of a subjects’ movement with a long exposure time. Think light trails from cars or fireworks.

    1. Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed, then turn the control wheel counterclockwise until BULB is indicated.
    2. Press the shutter button halfway down to adjust the focus.
    3. Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.
    4. As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.

    Formatt Hitech Firecrest ND filters review

    Tips:

    • Use a tripod for long exposures.
    • Use the PlayMemories remote or a wired remote control to eliminate any movement of the camera.
    • After shooting, noise reduction will be applied (as noise builds up quickly with long exposures). This will take as long as your long exposure did, and you won’t be able to use the camera until this is finished.

    Can’t get the shutter speed to Bulb Mode? Check these settings and turn them OFF:

    • Is Smile Shutter activated?
    • Is Auto HDR activated?
    • Is Picture Effect is set to HDR Painting or Rich-tone Mono?
    • Is Drive Mode set to Cont. Shooting, Cont. Bracket or Self-timer(Cont)?

    Movie:

    Although you can capture movies in any mode, it is easiest to change all related settings for movie recording here. You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.

    Press the MOVIE button to start recording and again to stop recording

    Menu:

    • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) adjusted automatically. Other settings can be adjusted manually, and the settings are retained.
    • Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

    When a zoom lens is mounted, you can also zoom by operating that lens. When a motor zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.

    Sweep Panorama:

    Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the images.

    • Panorama mode will capture a series of images in succession.
    • You’ll be guided through this process using an arrow on-screen that shows the direction and speed of the camera panning.
    • The A5000 will automatically detect and capture the series of images while panning.
    • Afterward, it will stitch together all these images into a wide view of the scenery and save it as a Jpeg.

    TIP: Panorama size (standard or wide) and panning direction can be changed in the MENU on page 1.

    Scene Selection Mode (SCN)

    Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. iAuto and Superior Auto detect these scenes automatically for you and applies the presets it deems best and does a very good job at that. However, in certain circumstances (when you know what you are going to capture) it is better to select the appropriate scene yourself, as it takes the guessing work out of the equation.

    The Sony A5000 has a decent range of well-designed presets:

    Portrait:

    Blurs background for a nice Bokeh, and sharpens the subject. How good this will look depends largely on the lens you’re using. A zoom is less suited to this kind of photography, best use a prime, fast lens.

    This preset accentuates the skin tones softly (you can select skin softening for all Modes in the Menu system too).

    SEL35F14Z
    portrait SEL35F14Z at f/1.4
    Sports Action:

    Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed (lso that the subject looks as if it is standing still. AF-C and continuous shooting hi is on, so you’ll be able to snap away while the shutter button is pressed.

    Macro:

    Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.

    Landscape:

    Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors. The camera will go to a smaller aperture to achieve this, as lenses are sharper corner-to-corner at smaller apertures.

    Sunset:

    Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.

    Night Scene:

    Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere. Will go to higher ISO values and larger apertures to achieve a useable shutter speed, enabling you to capture sharp images without blur. The A5000 does have its limitations when it comes to shooting dark scenery.

    Hand-held Twilight:

    Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise. This does not work well in my opinion.

    Night Portrait:

    Shoots night scene portraits using the built-in flash.

    Anti Motion Blur:

    Shutter Priority mode, which will use the fastest shutter speed possible, to counter motion blur.

    Best A5000 for shooting portraits and make-up

    Shooting portraits and makeup is a challenge for many photographers. Firstly we need to think about what we want to achieve. Do you want a blurred background? Then you’ll need a lens with a large aperture like the Sigma 60mm f2.8 DN or the Sony Sonnar T * FE 55mm F1.8 ZA. As a rule of thumb, the larger your aperture (the f-number), the more separation between subject (focus point) and background you’ll have. If you’re going for maximum sharpness and detail, you can stop down the lens (change aperture) to around f/8.

    Shooting at smaller apertures means that your lens will allow less light to enter the sensor, and a flash might be a good investment. I recommend a brand called Godox (or flashpoint/Neewer these are all the same brands) and also a ring flash diffuser to get a soft and even illumination of the face.

    PortraitPro 15 review

    To get real looking colors, It’s a good idea to set your creative style ((MENU → Camera Settings → page 5) to standard and find a suitable white balance (also on page 5). Try the ‘Fluor’ settings if you are shooting under fluorescent light.

    Other things you can consider are shooting in RAW so you have more control over white

    shooting in RAW so you have more control over white balance in Adobe Lightroom (or other RAW editors).

    Buy a so-called gray card for even more precise colors using custom white balance in your camera.

    Calibrate your monitor with something like Datacolour Spyder to make sure your monitor is displaying the colors as true as possible.

    Conclusion

    The Sony A5000 is certainly a very capable camera, and image quality rivals that of the A600 and A77II. At this price-point, that is almost unbelievable, and I’m sure many novice photographers will jump at the chance to get all this technology.

    You’ll probably start using it in iAuto mode, and this is well-implemented, except for the fact that the ISO range cannot be changed. After you’ve familiarized yourself with this mode, it is well worth getting to know the advanced functionality of this camera, as it often will yield better results than just setting it to iAuto.

    If you have any questions, feel free to comment below.

  • Sony A99II Hybrid Phase Detection AF system compatible lenses

    Sony A99II Hybrid Phase Detection AF system compatible lenses

    Sony A99II Hybrid Phase Detection AF system compatible lenses

    Introduction

    The ILCA-99M2 is equipped with a Hybrid Phase Detection AF system simultaneously driven by a focal plane phase detection AF sensor and a dedicated phase detection AF sensor.Hybrid Phase Detection AF system compatible lenses include several A-mount lenses such as full Frame A-mount lenses (with exceptions), etc. Furthermore, they can be used with Converters as well. Please refer to the following table for compatible lenses.

    Hybrid Phase Detection AF compatible lenses

    Prime lenses

    SAL135F18Z Sonnar T* 135mm F1.8 ZA
    SAL24F20Z Distagon T* 24mm F2 ZA SSM
    SAL300F28G 300mm F2.8 G
    SAL300F28G2 300㎜ F2.8 G SSM II
    SAL35F14G 35mm F1.4 G review
    SAL35F18 *1 DT 35mm F1.8 SAM
    SAL500F40G 500mm F4 G SSM
    SAL50F14 50mm F1.4
    SAL50F14Z Planar T* 50mm F1.4 ZA SSM
    SAL50F18 *1 DT 50mm F1.8 SAM
    SAL85F14Z Planar T* 85mm F1.4 ZA
    SAL85F28 85mm F2.8 SAM

    *1: The number of focus points: 221 points

    Macro lenses

    Model name Product name
    SAL100M28 100mm F2.8 Macro
    SAL30M28 *1*2 DT 30mm F2.8 Macro SAM
    SAL50M28 50mm F2.8 Macro

     

    *1: The number of focus points: 221 points

    *2: The number of focus points: 61 points in the dedicated phase detection AF area.

    Zoom lenses

    Model name Product name
    SAL1635Z Vario-Sonnar T* 16-35mm F2.8 ZA SSM
    SAL1635Z2 Vario-Sonnar T* 16-35mm F2.8 ZA SSM II
    SAL1650 *1 DT 16-50mm F2.8 SSM
    SAL1680Z *1 Vario-Sonnar T* DT 16-80mm F3.5-4.5 ZA
    SAL18135 *1 DT 18-135mm F3.5-5.6 SAM
    SAL1855 *1*2 DT 18-55mm F3.5-5.6 SAM
    SAL18552 *1*2 DT 18-55mm F3.5-5.6 SAM II
    SAL2470Z Vario-Sonnar T* 24-70mm F2.8 ZA SSM
    SAL2470Z2 Vario-Sonnar T* 24-70mm F2.8 ZA SSM II
    SAL2875 28-75mm F2.8 SAM
    SAL55200-2 *1*2 DT 55-200mm F4-5.6 SAM
    SAL55300 *1*2 DT 55-300mm F4.5-5.6 SAM
    SAL70200G 70-200mm F2.8 G
    SAL70200G2 70-200mm F2.8 G SSM II
    SAL70300G 70-300mm F4.5-5.6 G SSM
    SAL70300G2 70-300mm F4.5-5.6 G SSM II
    SAL70400G 70-400mm F4-5.6 G SSM
    SAL70400G2 70-400mm F4-5.6 G SSM II

    *1:The number of focus points: 221 points
    *2:The number of focus points: 61 points in the dedicated phase detection AF area.

    Converters

    Converters are compatible with the following lenses:

    SAL14TC 1.4x Teleconverter

    Model name Product name
    SAL300F28G 300mm F2.8 G
    SAL300F28G2 300㎜ F2.8 G SSM II
    SAL500F40G 500mm F4 G SSM
    SAL70200G 70-200mm F2.8 G
    SAL70200G2 70-200mm F2.8 G II

    SAL20TC 2.0x Teleconverter

    Model name Product name
    SAL300F28G 300mm F2.8 G
    SAL300F28G2 300㎜ F2.8 G SSM II
    SAL70200G 70-200mm F2.8 G
    SAL70200G2 70-200mm F2.8 G II

    Non-compatible lenses

    Fixed focal length lenses

    Model name Product name
    SAL16F28 16mm F2.8 Fisheye
    SAL20F28 20mm F2.8
    SAL28F28 28mm F2.8
    SAL135F28 *3 135mm F2.8 [T4.5] STF
    SAL500F80 *4 500mm F8 Reflex

    *3: The lens is dedicated for manual focus.

    *4: The number of focus points: One single point at the center. [Only Cross-Type AF] cannot be set.

    Zoom lenses

    Model name Product name
    SAL1118 *2 DT 11-18mm F4.5-5.6
    SAL16105 DT 16-105mm F3.5-5.6
    SAL18200 DT 18-200mm F3.5-6.3
    SAL18250 DT 18-250mm F3.5-6.3
    SAL1870 DT 18-70mm F3.5-5.6
    SAL24105 24-105mm F3.5-4.5
    SAL55200 *2 DT 55-200mm F4-5.6
    SAL75300 *2 75-300mm F4.5-5.6

    *2: The number of focus points: 61 points in the dedicated phase detection AF area.

    How to check Hybrid Phase Detection AF compatibility

    You can check if the lens is compatible with the Hybrid Phase Detection AF system from the camera screen by attaching a SONY A-mount lens to the camera.

    How to check:

    1. Attach the lens to the camera.
    2. Select MENU →  (Camera Settings1) → [AF System] → [Auto].
    3. Select [Selectable AF Area] → [Auto].
    4. Select [Focus Area] → [Wide].
    5. If the following A line is displayed on the shooting screen, the lens is compatible with the Hybrid Phase Detection AF system.

    Auto focus area settings

    The ILCA-99M2 is equipped with a Hybrid Phase Detection AF system simultaneously driven by a focal plane phase detection AF sensor and a dedicated phase detection AF sensor. With a Hybrid Phase Detection AF system compatible lens, you can use Hybrid Cross AF Points that measure the range using these 2 AF sensors.

    Hybrid Phase Detection AF system

    AF when using a compatible lens

    By setting [AF System] of  (Camera Settings1) to [Auto], and switching [Selectable AF Area] to [Auto] or [Only Cross-Type AF], you can set to an AF area that suits your preference.

    [AF System]: When set to [Auto]

    Selectable AF Area AF Area (Conceptual diagram) Features
    Auto In addition to Hybrid Cross AF Points, this setting uses a focal plane phase detection AF sensor positioned in the wide range and high density. It is possible to measure a wider area in high density and multiple points compared to the dedicated phase detection AF sensor.
    Only Cross-Type AF A setting that uses only Hybrid Cross AF Points. By limiting to the AF area that simultaneously detects both horizontal detection and vertical detection, it is less affected by the subject pattern and is superior in focusing performance.

    Refer to the following for the features of each Focus Area depending on the [Selectable AF Area] settings when [AF System] is set to [Auto].

    Wide

    Selectable AF Area AF Area (Conceptual diagram) Features
    Auto Automatically selects which area will be used for focus of 399 AF points at maximum. Effective for scenes with intense movement in a wide range.
    Only Cross-Type AF Focuses with 79 Hybrid Cross AF Points at maximum. Uses only the Hybrid Cross AF Points in the center of the monitor and is superior in focusing performance.

     

    Zone

    Selectable AF Area AF Area (Conceptual diagram) Features
    Auto Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus. You can choose among 15 zones. The area for focus in the chosen zone is automatically selected.
    Only Cross-Type AF Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus. You can choose among 9 zones. The area for focus in the selected region is automatically selected.The selectable AF area only uses Hybrid Cross AF area, so it is superior in focusing performance.

     Center
    Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the monitor. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the composition you want.

    Flexible Spot

    Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the AF area and focus on an tiny subject or a narrow area.

    Selectable AF Area Flexible Spot Points AF Area (Conceptual diagram) Features
    Auto All Selectable from 323 AF points at maximum. Useful for shooting landscape scenes with a composition of your preference or portraits.
    63 Points Of the 323 AF points at maximum, the AF point is selectable from the limited 63 AF points, and by positioning the subject entirely on the monitor, the AF points can be swiftly switched. Useful for shooting subjects that mainly change positions on the screen such as airplanes, birds, etc.
    15 Points Selectable from the 15 Hybrid Cross AF Points limited to the center area and can swiftly switch the AF points to the subject in the monitor. Effective for shooting soccer matches, motor sports, etc. where subjects move rapidly left and right. The selectable AF area only uses Hybrid Cross AF area so it is superior in focusing performance.
    Only Cross-Type AF All Since you can select from 79 Hybrid Cross AF Points at maximum, it is recommended to shoot scenes composed that suit your preference by placing the subject in the center and performing detailed adjustments of the AF points.
    15 Points Selectable from the 15 Hybrid Cross AF Points limited to the center area and can swiftly switch the AF points to the subject in the monitor. Effective for shooting soccer matches, motor sports, etc. where items move rapidly left and right. The selectable AF area only uses Hybrid Cross AF area, so it is superior in focusing performance.

     Expand Flexible Spot
    If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses AF points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    Expand Flexible Spot Points can be selected as with Flexible Spot above. Please refer to the description of Flexible Spot.

         Lock-on AF
    [Lock-on AF] is recommended to shoot while staying focused on a subject and while freely changing framing. (This setting is available only when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].) Press the shutter button halfway to start tracking. To specify where to start tracking, choose among Focus Area selections. [Center] or [Flexible Spot] (both have a narrow focus area) for subjects moving slowly when tracking starts; [Expand Flexible Spot] for normal subject movement; and [Zone] or [Wide] for higher focusing performance when the subject moves intensely within frame. After lock-on, focusing is not dependent on the selected Focus Area and keeps focusing in the same area as the [Wide] tracking range.

    AF when using a non-compatible lens

    If a Hybrid Phase Detection AF system non-compatible lens is attached or [AF System] is set to [Ddc Phase AF Only], the AF areas become the following.

    [AF System]: When set to [Ddc Phase AF Only]

    AF Area (Conceptual diagram) Features
    Uses only 79 dedicated phase detection AF points at maximum.

    Refer to the following for the features of each Focus Area.

    Wide

    AF Area (Conceptual diagram) Features
    Automatically focuses from 79 AF points at maximum.

    Zone

    AF Area (Conceptual diagram) Features
    Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus. You can choose among 9 zones. The area for focus in the selected zone is automatically selected.

     Center

    Center focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the monitor. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the composition you want.

    Flexible Spot

    Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the AF area.Flexible Spot Points can be selected from the following two methods.

    Flexible Spot Points AF Area (Conceptual diagram) Features
    All Since you can choose from 79 AF points at maximum, it is recommended to shoot scenes composed that suit your preference by placing the subject in the center and performing precise adjustments of the area.
    15 Points Selectable from the 15 limited AF points of the dedicated phase detection AF points and is effective when positioning subjects, and you want to switch areas swiftly.

     Expand Flexible Spot
    If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses AF points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    Expand Flexible Spot Points can be selected in the same two methods (All/15 Points) as Flexible Spot described above. Please refer to the description of Flexible Spot.

         Lock-on AF
    [Lock-on AF] is recommended to shoot while staying focused on a subject and while freely changing framing.(This setting is available only when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].)Press the shutter button halfway to start tracking. To specify where to start tracking, choose among Focus Area selections. [Center] or [Flexible Spot] (both have a narrow focus area) for subjects moving slowly when tracking starts; [Expand Flexible Spot] for normal subject movement; and [Zone] or [Wide] for higher focusing performance when the subject moves intensely within frame.After lock-on, focusing is not dependent on the selected Focus Area and keeps focusing in the same area as the [Wide] tracking range.

    Autofocus during continuous shooting

    For the first shot of continuous shooting, all of the focus points are available if the Hybrid Phase Detection AF system is active, and the dedicated phase detection AF area are available if the Hybrid Phase Detection AF system is not active. Focus points available from the second shot onward are described in the table below.

    To make autofocus track during continuous shooting, set [Focus Mode] of the camera to  (Continuous AF) or  (Automatic AF).

    Points for using autofocus during continuous shooting:

    • If the Shooting mode is set to [A] or [M] mode, the area where AF can be utilized changes depending on the set aperture value.
    • If the Shooting mode is set to [P] or [S] mode, the camera selects the aperture value that AF can be used in all areas as much as possible.
    • Continuous Shooting: In [Hi ] mode, when the aperture squeezes more than F3.5 even if the Shooting mode is set to [P] or [S] under an extremely bright environment, lower the ISO value or use the ND filter and reduce the aperture value to 3.5 or below to perform AF in all areas using 2 AF sensors.

    Hybrid Phase Detection AF system

    When the lens is compatible

    AF from the second shot onward

    Continuous Shooting Minimum F value* – F3.5 F4 – F8 F9 or more
    Hi
    (Hybrid Cross AF Points: 61 Points)
    AF in all AF areas*1
    Maximum AF points:399 Points
    Only focal plane phase detection AF sensor of all AF areas is active*2
    Maximum AF points:399 Points
    Focus is locked when the first shot is taken*3
    Hi/Mid
    (Hybrid Cross AF Points: 79 Points)
    AF in all AF areas*4
    Maximum AF points:399 Points
    Only the dedicated phase detection AF area is active and focal plane phase detection AF area is locked to the focus of the first shot.*5
    Maximum AF points:79 Points
    Lo
    (Hybrid Cross AF Points: 79 Points)
    AF in all AF areas*4
    Maximum AF points:399 Points

    Minimum F value* : For lenses with a Minimum F value of F3.5 and over when set to Minimum F value, they correspond to the aperture of the above table.

    Note :
    Even if the lens is compatible with the Hybrid Phase Detection AF system, AF of the first shot is limited to the dedicated phase detection AF area as with non-compatible lenses in the following case.

    • [AF System] is set to [Ddc Phase AF Only].
    • [Selectable AF Area] is set to [Only Cross-Type AF].

    *1:
    The red frame in the diagram below is an effective AF area after the second shot. If you are measuring the range with Hybrid Cross AF Points, a rectangular green focusing frame is displayed. If you are measuring the range using only the focal plane phase detection AF sensor, a small square green focusing frame is displayed. Furthermore, when tracking focus during continuous shooting, the focus display on the bottom left area of the screen becomes  .
    (Conceptual diagram)

    A:focal plane phase detection AF points
    B:Hybrid Cross AF Points

    *2:
    The red frame in the diagram below is an effective AF area after the second shot. If you are measuring the range using only the focal plane phase detection AF sensor, a square green focusing frame is displayed. Furthermore, when tracking focus during continuous shooting, the focus display on the bottom left area of the screen becomes  .
    (Conceptual diagram)

    A:focal plane phase detection AF points

    *3:
    Focus after the second shot is locked to the focus of the first shot and the focus display on the bottom left area of the screen becomes  .
    (Conceptual diagram)

    *4:
    The red frame in the diagram below is an effective AF area after the second shot. If you are measuring the range with Hybrid Cross AF Points, a rectangular green focusing frame is displayed. If you are measuring the range using only the focal plane phase detection AF sensor, a small square green focusing frame is displayed. Furthermore, when tracking focus during continuous shooting, the focus display on the bottom left area of the screen becomes  .
    (Conceptual diagram)

    A:focal plane phase detection AF points
    B:Hybrid Cross AF Points

    *5:
    The red frame in the diagram below is an effective AF area after the second shot, and there, a square green focusing frame is displayed when measuring the range using only the dedicated phase detection AF sensor. In other areas, focus is locked when the first shot is taken with the focal plane phase detection AF sensor. Furthermore, when tracking focus during continuous shooting, the focus display on the bottom left area of the screen becomes  . When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], and [Zone], focus tracks during continuous shooting when the focus area of the first shot in continuous shooting is selected with the following red frame.
    (Conceptual diagram)

    A:Dedicated phase detection AF points

    When the lens is non-compatible*

    *The same applies when [Ddc Phase AF Only] is selected for [AF System].

    AF from the second shot onward

    Continuous Shooting Minimum F value* – F3.5 F4~
    Hi AF in the dedicated phase detection AF area*6
    Maximum AF points:61 points
    Focus is locked when the first shot is taken in the dedicated phase detection AF area*7
    Hi/Mid/Lo AF in the dedicated phase detection AF area*6
    Maximum AF points:79 Points

    Minimum F value* : For lenses with a Minimum F value of F3.5 and over when set to Minimum F value, they correspond to the aperture of the above table.

    *6:
    The red frame in the diagram below is an effective AF area after the second shot. A square green focusing frame is displayed when measuring the range using only the dedicated phase detection AF sensor. Furthermore, when tracking focus during continuous shooting, the focus display on the bottom left area of the screen becomes  .
    (Conceptual diagram)

    A:Dedicated phase detection AF points

    *7:
    Focus after the second shot is locked to the focus of the first shot and the focus display on the bottom left area of the screen becomes  .
    (Conceptual diagram)

    A:Dedicated phase detection AF points

  • Sony A99II free unofficial guide, tips and tricks

    Sony A99II unofficial guide, tips and tricks

    Besides the advanced customizable autofocus functions, The Sony A99 II has some more hidden features that you might want to familiarize yourself with.

    I’ll start with some of my settings after a few months’ experience with the A99 M2.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your camera, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time, and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.

    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.

    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 1

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 1
    First page of Quality and Image Size settings
    Quality:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.

    RAW file size:

    You can choose between either compressed or uncompressed RAW. Compressed files are smaller, but there is also a small degradation of quality, especially noticeable in long exposures and scenes with high contrast. If you notice haloing in the sky during post processing for instance, then this is an artifact of that compression.

    Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable (when you set Quality to jpeg). Set it to large for optimal quality, if SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Knowing the pixel size can tell you how large you can print your images without quality degradation. There are techniques nowadays to print larger, but this information might be interesting to some.

    When  Aspect Ratio is set to 3:2:

    • L: 42M 7952×5304 pixels
    • M: 18M 5168×3448 pixels
    • S: 11M 3984×2656 pixels

    When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:

    • L: 36M 7952×4472 pixels
    • M: 15M 5168×2912 pixels
    • S: 8.9M 3984×2240 pixels

    When APS-C/Super 35mm is On:

    •  3:2 L: 18M 5168×3448 pixels
    • 3:2 M: 11M 3984×2656 pixels
    • 3:2 S: 4.5M 2592×1728 pixels
    • 16:9 L: 15M 5168×2912 pixels
    • 16:9 M: 8.9M 3984×2240 pixels
    • 16:9 S: 3.8M 2592×1456 pixels
    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface) or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    APS-C/Super 35mm:

    This setting tells the camera what to do when you’ve attached an APS-C lens to this full-frame camera. An APS-C lens won’t cover the full surface of the sensor, or you’ll notice heavy vignetting towards the edges of the frame. When recording movies, this crop is called Super 35mm. The principle here is that you use any a part of the surface of the sensor. If you want to do this, don’t worry too much about image quality as this is a high megapixel camera leaving you with a usable 18MP in APS-C mode.

    • On: Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
    • Auto: Automatically sets the capture range depending on the lens.
    • Off: Always captures 35mm full-size image sensor pictures.
    Panorama Size:

    (when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the camera to do efficiently.

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 2

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 2
    Second page of Quality/image size settings
    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.

    Lens Comp

    The Sony A99 II allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON.

    MENU →Red Camera Icon → page 3

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 3
    Shoot mode and drive settings
    Drive Mode

    Do you want to take a single picture when you press the shutter button or multiple images? You can select this here, as well as self-timer functions and bracketing.

    Bracketing is taking a series of pictures, each with different settings, useful for combining your images with various exposures for HDR effects in software afterward, to name just one example.

    You can also press the dedicated drive mode button to get to these settings.

    • Single Shooting: Normal shooting mode.
    • Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
    • Self-timer: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
    • Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
    • Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
    • WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and color filter.
    • DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
    Bracket Settings

    You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

    • Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
    • Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
    Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.

    Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

    This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the camera. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 4

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 4
    Autofocus settings page 1
    Focus Mode:

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)

    • AF-S: With a half-press of the shutter button, the camera will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.
    • AF-A: AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard setting and the easiest to use.
    • AF-C: The camera will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.
    • DMF: The ILCA-99M2 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.
    • MF: No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

    You can see a focus indicator on screen or EVF. When it is lit, the subject is in Focus and focus is locked.

    Tip: if autofocus doesn’t seem to be working, check the lens barrel to see if the AF/MF slider is set to AF. It’s also possible to assign a button for what is called ‘Focus Hold’. With Focus Hold, you can freeze your focus point when you press this button. This is often used by photographers to allow for a greater flexibility in composition.

    Another important fact is that in Movie mode, only Continuous AF and MF are available.

    Priority Set in AF-S:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.

    Options are:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    Priority Set in AF-C:

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion.

    Choose between:

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
    Focus area

    The Sony 99 Mark 2  has an advanced autofocus system, including both on-sensor AF detection points and a separate phase detection unit. This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    • Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
    • Zone: Zone allows you to select one of 9 predefined areas where autofocus will be active. These zones each cover about 25% of the screen, with a slight overlap. You can quickly change the area by pressing the multi-controller button and navigating to any of the other areas.
    • Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centred.
    • Flexible spot: Flexible spot area selects a place anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center)  You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
    • Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
    • Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the camera tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot.

    Available focus areas:

    • When the Hybrid Phase Detection AF system is active, the entire focus area including the focal plane phase detection AF area is available.
    • When the Hybrid Phase Detection AF system is not active, dedicated phase detection AF area is available.

    Tip: You can move the focus area in Flexible Spot, Expand Flexible Spot or Zone by operating the multi-selector (the little joystick).

    Something not working? Check these settings before panicking:

    1. Focus Area is locked to Wide when the camera is set to Intelligent Auto, Lock-on AF or Eye AF.
    2. The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.
    3. When the mode dial is set to ‘Movie/S&Q Motion’ or during movie shooting, Lock-on AF cannot be selected as the Focus Area
    4. When using Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom, a dotted square frame may appear around the whole screen depending on the zoom scale. The camera will autofocus using the entire screen.
    Selectable AF Area:

    Although the Sony A99 II can focus using 399 focus points at maximum, you can also limit the available focus points manually.

    • Auto: The number of focus points used for focusing are set automatically depending on the lens or shooting mode. Uses all 399 focus points at maximum.
    • Only Cross-Type AF: Limits available 79 focus points at a maximum in the cross-type AF area.

    Troubleshooting; The number of focus points available might be limited due to the lens you’re using.

    • SAL75300, SAL1118, SAL55200, SAL1855, SAL18552, SAL55200-2, SAL30M28, SAL55300 only have 61 focus points available.
    • SAL500F80: only the center focus spot is available.

    Tip: I recommend that you set the camera to ‘Only Cross-Type AF’ whenWhen you want to prevent the number of focus points from changing automatically depending on the lens you attach when focusing is difficult at the surrounding points or when you want to select a focus area quickly by limiting the available focus point.

    Troubleshooting:

    If you attach a lens that does not support Hybrid Phase Detection AF, or the AF System is set to ‘Ddc Phase AF Only’, a focus area that does not perform cross-type detection will also be used even when ‘Selectable AF Area’ is set to ‘Only Cross-Type AF’.

    When the shooting mode is set to (Movie/S&Q Motion), the AF System is locked to ‘Ddc Phase AF Only’ and the number of focus points is limited to 61.

    AF system:

    Here you can select if you want to use the Hybrid Phase Detection AF system (uses both the focal plane phase detection AF sensor and the dedicated phase detection AF sensor) or use only the dedicated phase detection AF sensor. I would normally use both.

    • Auto: Uses both the focal plane phase detection AF sensor and the dedicated phase detection AF sensor depending on the lens or the shooting mode.
    • Ddc Phase AF Only: Always uses only the dedicated phase detection AF sensor.

    MENU →Red Camera Icon → page 5

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 5
    Autofocus settings page 2
    Flexible Spot Points

    When the Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot, and you want to select a focus area quickly, you can limit the available number of focus points. In my view, it is best to set them to 63 points, as these also cover over 70% of the sensor and it is just easier to change your focus point quickly between 63 points than 323 focus points.

    • All: Selects from 323 focus points at maximum.
    • 63 Points: Uses the limited 63 focus points out of 323. Available only when the lens that supports the Hybrid Phase Detection AF is attached, and AF System is set to Auto.
    • 15 Points: Uses the limited 15 points out of all the points of the dedicated phase detection AF sensor.
    AF illuminator

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the camera to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

    Center Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the A99II  is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    AF Drive speed 

    You can select the autofocus speed to Fast or Slow.

    Tip: You might think faster is better, but in real life, you’ll often find that Fast focusses on any slight movement and that it’s best to set it to Slow.

    If you conclude that the Sony A99ii does not focus fast enough for your needs, this setting and the next are worth experimenting with!

    AF track sens:

    High is useful when shooting fast action scenery. The standard mode works fine in most situations, but you can also try responsive if you need faster tracking capabilities. Locked on keeps the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    MENU → Camera Settings → page 6

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 6
    Autofocus settings page 3
    Eye Start AF:

    This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.

    AF Rng.Ctrl Assist:

    Sets whether to display or not that the subject is within the set distance during the AF range control.

    AF Area Auto Clear:

    Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

    Wide AF Area Disp:

    You can set whether the focus area should be displayed or not when Focus Area is set to Wide.

    AF Micro Adj.:

    Allows you to adjust and register autofocused positions for each lens. In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focus areas or focal lengths. You can make adjustments for both center and corner areas.

    Note that the autofocus function may not be performed at a proper position when using this adjustment.

    Center area:

    • The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the camera. The smaller the value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to the camera.
    • To adjust the autofocus position for the dedicated phase detection AF area, set the value for the center area.
    • If the adjustment for the center area is not needed, you can skip this step.

    Corner area:

    Set the values for the corner areas if the adjustment of the autofocused positions outside of the dedicated phase detection AF are needed.

    In general, the adjustment for the center area is applied to both the focal plane phase detection AF sensor and the dedicated phase detection AF sensor. The adjustments for the corner areas are applied to the focal plane phase detection AF sensor. For focal lengths between the wide end and the telephoto end, the values interpolated by the values for each end are applied.

    It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions. To do so, set Focus Area to Flexible Spot and use a bright subject with high contrast when you adjust.

    When the focal plane phase detection AF area is narrowed, such as when an APS-C size dedicated lens is attached, the adjustable area is the narrowed AF area only.

    When a prime lens is attached, you cannot enter the adjustment value for the telephoto end. The adjustment value for the wide end is applied.

    You cannot adjust the autofocus position for the corner areas in following situations:

    • Selectable AF Area is set to Only Cross-Type AF.
    • Flexible Spot Points is set to 15 Points.

    When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the registered value appears on the screen. [±0] appears for lenses for which a value has not yet been registered.

    If [-] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered and no new lens can be registered. To register a new lens, attach a lens for which the registration can be erased, and set its value to [±0], or reset the values of all the lenses using [Clear].

    The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you perform [AF Micro Adj.] with lenses other than the supported lenses, the registered settings for the supported lenses may be affected. Do not perform [AF Micro Adj.] with an unsupported lens.

    You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-Minolta lens of the same specification.

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 7

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 7
    Exposure settings page 1
    Exposure Comp

    (Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):

    If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

    I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO,  you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

    Iso Auto Min SS.

    This is a useful and exciting setting. If you select ISO AUTO you are in  P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority) mode; you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing. The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.

    You have three possibilities here:

    • FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard (normal). This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the camera is capable of doing so.
    • STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
    • SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.
    • 1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.

    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.

    In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).

    • Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
    • Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
    • Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
    • Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
    • Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

    Tip: When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.

    Spot Metering Point

    Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.

    • Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
    • Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

    Exposure step

    You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.

    MENU →Red Camera Icon → page 8

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 8
    Exposure settings page 2
    AEL w shutter

    Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

    • Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The camera keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    Exposure Std. Adjust

    Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to 1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 9

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 9
    Flash Menu
    Flash Mode:

    (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button)

    As the A99 has a pop-up flash, you might want to get into the different Flash Modes. If you’re new to photography, I’d suggest setting it to Auto, where the camera will decide when and how you need the flash.

    If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
    • Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    • Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).

    Exp comp set

    Selects if the Exposure compensation function ( -5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.

    Flash control
    • ADI flash: The camera’s flash control uses the focus distance information and brightness value of the subject when the pre-flash is reflected. This gives precise flash control without hardly being affected by the reflective level of the subject.
    • Pre-flash TTL: The camera’s flash control uses the brightness value of the subject when the pre-flash is reflected. If this setting is used, the camera’s ability to precisely measure the flash may be affected by reflections from the subject.
    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 10

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 10
    Color, White balance and image processing settings
    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    Priority Set in AWB

    Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.

    • Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
    • Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
    • White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    (not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.

    • Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
    • Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
    • Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
    • Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
    • Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
    • Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
    • Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
    • Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
    • Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
    • Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
    • Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
    • Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.

    You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.

    This functionality can be changed:

    • Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
    • Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
    • Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).

    • Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
    • Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
    • Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
    • Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
    • Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
    • Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
    • Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
    • High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
    • Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
    Picture Profile

    Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.

    The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of [Gamma] (gamma curve) and [Color Mode] (color characteristics) settings.

    Gamma:
      • Movie: Standard gamma curve for video.
      • Still: Standard gamma curve for still images.
      • Cine1: Softens the contrast in darker image areas and emphasizes gradation changes in lighter image areas, producing a subdued tone overall (equivalent to HG4609G33) Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 33% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 109%. Images shot with this gamma can be used without grading, but since the images have smooth gradation characteristics, this can be used to grade and finalize the viewed image in the post-production process.
      • Cine2: Similar results to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal (equivalent to HG4600G30)
        Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 30% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 100%.
      • Cine3: Stronger contrast between dark and light image areas and greater emphasis on black gradation changes (compared to [Cine1] and [Cine2])
      • Cine4: Stronger contrast than [Cine3] in darker image areas.
      • ITU709 ITU709 gamma curve (low-light gain of 4.5).
      • ITU709: (800%) Gamma curve for checking scenes recorded using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
      • S-Log2 [S-Log2] gamma curve. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 32%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. The maximum value of video output is 106%.
      • S-Log3: [S-Log3] gamma curve with characteristics closer to those of film. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. It allows for better reproduction of gradations in shadows and the mid-tone range than S-Log2. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 41%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. As a characteristic of S-Log3, the dynamic range can be extended above 1,300%. However, Picture Profile is set to a dynamic range of 1,300% in order to maintain a balance with camera performance. Under these conditions, the maximum value of video output is 94%.
    Color Mode:
      • Movie Color tones for [Movie] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for movies when Picture Profile is not used)
      • Still Color tones for [Still] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for still images when Picture Profile is not used)
      • Cinema Color tones for [Cine1] and [Cine2] gamma curve
      • Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
      • ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
      • Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white
        S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
      • S-Gamut3.Cine Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
      • This setting is easier to use than [S-Gamut3], because it limits the color space to a more practical range than that of [S-Gamut3]. It is recommended in cases where [S-Gamut3], a wide color space, is not required.
      • S-Gammut3 Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
        This setting has a wider color space than that of [S-Gamut3.Cine]. It is suited for converting images to a format with a wide color space like BT.2020.
        Depending on the type of camera, the entire [S-Gamut3] color space may not be supported.
    Black Level:

    This function adjusts the black level of the image -15 to 15.  As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression.

    Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image, while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.

    If you want to simulate an old film, or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black. When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies.

    This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.

    Black Gamma:

    This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas. Range available between Wide, Middle or Narrow. Leven between -7 and 7.

    [Range] controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The [Narrow] setting keeps the range close to black, while the [Wide] setting extends the range to gray. [Range] should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you want to adjust the overall image tone, [Range] should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the [Narrow] setting.

    Increasing the [Level] value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set [Range] to [Narrow] and decrease the [Level] value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.

    Knee:

    This function sets the knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.

    First, select whether to set the knee point and slope automatically or manually in [Mode], and then adjust each setting.

    • Knee > Mode: Auto / Manual
    • Knee > Auto Set > Max Point: 90% to 100%
    • Knee > Auto Set > Sensitivity: High / Mid / Low
    • Knee > Manual Set > Point: 75% to 105%
    • Knee > Manual Set > Slope: –5 to 5
    Mode:
    Auto:
    Automatically adjusts the knee based on what is selected in the following settings (when [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma]).

    • [Max Point] determines the maximum knee point level (white level). The knee slope is automatically adjusted according to the Max Point setting. The standard is to keep it at 100%. A lower setting will turn white grayish, while a higher setting will discard gradations in high luminance areas.
    • [Sensitivity] changes the luminance level at which the knee’s automatic adjustment starts. When set to [High], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at lower input signal levels than normal. When set to [Low], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at higher input signal levels than normal.
    • When a parameter other than [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma], the gamma curve will not exceed the White clip point and over-exposure rarely occurs. When [Mode] is set to [Auto] with these settings, the Knee function is disabled. If you want to enable the Knee function, set [Mode] to [Manual].
    Manual:
    Sticks to settings based on the following selections.

    • [Point] sets the position of the knee point output level.
    • [Slope] determines the inclination of the knee slope.
      A negative slope setting results in a gentler knee slope angle. This expands the dynamic range, but reduces the ability to produce rich gradations. A positive slope setting makes the knee slope inclination steeper. This shrinks the dynamic range, but bolsters the ability to express gradations. When [Slope] is set to 5, the Knee function is disabled.
    • Set [Point] and [Slope] in [Manual Set] in combination. If you select a higher setting for [Point] and a gentler setting for [Slope], you can obtain video-like sharp highlight effects. If softer film-like highlight effects are desired, select a lower setting for [Point] and a steeper setting for [Slope]. In practical terms, move [Point] and [Slope] up and down in opposite directions while checking the gradations in high luminance areas until you find the ideal settings.
    Saturation

    A positive value results in more vivid colors, while a negative value presents faded colors. Saturation must be adjusted in tandem with contrast. Bright and vivid settings produce video-like images, while dark and vivid settings result in film-like images. The combination of bright and light creates pastel tones, whereas dark and light settings create artistic finishes.

    Color Phase

    As you rotate the color wheel to the left (decreasing the set value) or to the right (increasing the set value), the colors shift along the spectrum from red to yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta and red. Because this affects all colors, it is difficult to make specific adjustments exactly as intended. Use this function when matching coloring closely between different cameras.

    Color Depth

    This function adjusts the luminance for each color phase. The luminance changes more drastically when the selected color is richer (higher saturation). It does not change much at all when the color is achromatic.

    A higher set value lowers luminance while deepening the color. A lower set value increases luminance, making the color look paler.
    This setting does not only enhance the apparent vividness of colors, but also can express deep, dark colors.
    Because each of the 6 colors — R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow) — can be adjusted individually, you can apply this function to just the colors you want to emphasize.

    Emphasizing image edges (Detail)

    This function adjusts how much detail is applied to the subject’s image edges.

    Because settings other than [Level] are quite complex, we recommend you start by adjusting only the [Level] setting first.

    Level

    This function determines the strength of detail image processing to be applied.

    • If you apply too much detail, the subject’s original atmosphere may be undermined, as its translucence may be lost or it may be given an unnatural luster. Excessive detail when shooting shiny leaves, for instance, may result in the leaves looking as if they are made of plastic. It is also advisable to apply detail only modestly when shooting paintings.
    • Because Detail makes image edges wider, the original texture of a subject consisting of very fine lines may be lost if too much detail processing is applied. (Example: thin lace curtains)
    • Also, be aware that Detail may fatten up the edges of noise particles that appear under a high gain setting, and may make such particles highly noticeable. In such cases, you can adjust the amount of detail processing on the noise particles by using the [Crispening] function.
    • The image edges become more visible when viewed on large screens. It may be advisable to ease off on Detail if you plan to view the image on large TVs or screens.

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 11

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 11
    Focus assist settings
    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the camera to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    Initial Focus Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

    Full-frame shooting:

    • x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
    • x7.8: Displays a 7.8-times enlarged image.

    APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting:

    • x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
    • x5.1: Displays a 5.1-times enlarged image.
    Peaking Level
            • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.
            • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
            • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 12

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 red camera icon page 12
    Face Detection and shoot assist settings
    Anti-flicker Shoot.

    Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to moments when flickering will have less of an impact. This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.

    • Off: Does not reduce influences caused by flickering.
    • On: Reduces influences caused by flickering. When the camera detects flickering while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, (flicker icon).
    Face Detection

    Detects the faces of your subjects and adjusts the focus, exposure, flash settings and performs image processing automatically.  Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.

    When the Sony A99 II detects a face, a gray face detection frame appears. When the camera determines that autofocus is enabled, the face detection frame turns white. When you press the shutter button halfway down, the frame turns green.

    In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the camera automatically selects the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of other registered faces turn reddish-purple.

    • Off: Does not use the [Face Detection] function.
    • On (Regist. Faces): Detects the registered face with higher priority using [Face Registration].
    • On: Detects a face without giving higher priority to the registered face.
    Face Registration (New Registration)

    If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

    1. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].
    2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
    3. When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 1

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 purple camera icon page 1
    Movie settings page 1
    Movie/S&Q Motion

    You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting or slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.

    • Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
    • Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
    File Format (video)

    You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S HD, AVCHD or MP4. AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4.  You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.

    • XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
    • XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
    • AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
    • MP4: Records MP4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets, web uploads, and email attachments. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, recording will stop automatically.
    Record Setting  (video):

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.

    When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:

    • 30p/25p: 30p 60M/25p 60Mbps or 30p 100M/25p 100Mbps.
    • 24p: 24p 60Mbps or 24p 100Mbps if your camera is set to NTSC

    When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:

    • 120p/100p: 120p 60M/100p 60Mbps or 120p 100M/100p 100Mbps.
    • 30p/25p: 60p 50Mbps/50p 50Mbps.
    • 60p/50p: 30p 50Mbps/25p 50Mbps.
    • 24p: 24p 50Mbps when set to NTSC.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

    • 60i/50i: 60i 17Mbps(FH)/50i 17Mbps(FH) or 60i 24Mbps(FX)/50i 24Mbps(FX).
    • 60p/50p: 60p 28Mbps(PS)/50p 28Mbps(PS).
    • 24p/25p: 24p 17Mbps(FH)/25p 17Mbps(FH) or 24p 24Mbps(FX)/25p 24Mbps(FX).

    When File Format is set to MP4 you have these options:

    • 60p/50p: 1920×1080 60p 28Mbps/1920×1080 50p 28Mbps.
    • 30p/25p: 1280×720 30p 6Mbps/1280×720 25p 6Mbps or 1920×1080 30p 16Mbps/1920×1080 25p 16Mbps.
    S&Q settings

    You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

    How to record slow motion movie on the Sony A99 II:

    1. Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
    2. Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[Movie/S&Q Motion]→ and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
    3. Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
    4. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

    Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.

    Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.

    Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [Frame Rate].

    Dual Video REC

    Allows you to simultaneously record an XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie. You can simultaneously record a movie in different movie formats onto a memory card. To set the recording mode for 2 memory cards, such as simultaneous recording or sort recording, use Recording Mode.

    AF Track Sens (movie)

    You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.

    • Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
    • Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
    • Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.

    MENU →Purple Camera Icon→ page 2

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 purple camera icon page 2
    Movie settings page 2
    Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

    Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.

    • On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
    • Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut.. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.

    Audio Rec Level

    You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

    Audio Level Display

    Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

    Don’t see the audio level display?

    • Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
    • Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.
    • During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.
    Audio Out Timing

    You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio during HDMI output.

    • Live: Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when the audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
    • Lip Sync: Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    MENU →Purple Camera Icon→ page 3

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 purple camera icon page 3
    Movie settings page 3
    Marker Display (movie)

    Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie modeThe markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder

    Marker Settings (movie)

    Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.

    • Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
    • Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. [Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
    • Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
    • Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
    Video Light Mode

    Sets the illumination setting for the optional HVL-LBPC LED light.

    • Power Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
    • REC Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
    • REC Link&STBY: The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
    • Auto: The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

    MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 4

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 purple camera icon page 4
    Shutter and Steadyshot (Ibis) settings
    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    This shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Release without lens

    Makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the camera. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)

    Release without card

    If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

    SteadyShot

    Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (sensor stabilization) function.For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.

    SteadyShot Settings

    If your lens does not relay focal length information to the A99 II body, you can still use the Ibis stabilization by dialing in the focal length manually.

    • Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
    • Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)

    (MENU →Purple Camera Icon→ page 5)

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 purple camera icon page 5
    Zoom settings
    Zoom

    Turn the digital zoom functionality on or off.

    Zoom settings

    Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens

    Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image):

    Digital zoom:

    Pictures captured by the image sensor of the camera are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

    Clear Image Zoom:

    Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the camera uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.

    MENU →Purple Camera Icon→ page 6

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 purple camera icon page 6
    Display and Auto review settings page 1
    Disp button

    Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behaviour of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Zebra

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.

    Grid Line (stills)

    Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

    • Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
    • Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
    • Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
    • Off: Does not display the grid line.
    Exposure set guide

    The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.

    Live view Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.

    MENU →Purple Camera Icon→ page 7

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 purple camera icon page 7
    Display and Auto review settings page 2
    Auto Review

    You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting.  You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.

    (MENU →Purple Camera Icon→ page 8)

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 purple camera icon page 8
    Custom operations settings page 1
    Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, if you assign [Eye AF] to [Center Button] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)], you can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the center of the multi-selector while shooting.

    Custom Key(PB)

    1. Drive Mode Button
    2. WB Button
    3. Exp. Comp. Button
    4. ISO Button
    5. AF/MF Button
    6. AEL Button
    7. Center Button
    8. Fn/ Button 9. Button (Smart Tele. Button )
    9. Custom Button 1
    10. Custom Button 2
    11. Front Multi Ctrl./ Front Multi Ctrl.
    12. Preview Button
    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

    Dial Setup

    You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.

    Dial Ev Comp

    You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

    MOVIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.

    • Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
    • Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie/S&Q Motion] mode.

    MENU →Purple Camera Icon→ page 9

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 purple camera icon page 9
    Custom operations settings page 2
    Dial Lock

    You can set whether the dials will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again

    • Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
    • Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
    Audio Signals

    Selects whether the product produces a sound or not, for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 1

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 wireless icon page 1
    Wireless settings page 2
    Send To Smartphone
            • You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
            • You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
            • You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A99 mark 2 screen.
            • It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
            • You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
            • When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network. 

    Ctrl w/ smartphone

    By connecting the camera to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.

    Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    Wi-Fi Settings:
    WPS Push

    If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

    Access Point Set.

    You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

    Disp MAC Address

    Displays the MAC address of your Sony A99 II.

    SSID/PW Reset

    Your camera shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 2

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 wireless icon page 2
    Wireless settings page 1
    Bluetooth Settings.

    Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

    Loc. Info. Link Set

    You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.

    To use the location information linking function of the camera, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection

    Procedure:

    1. Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
    2. On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
    3. On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].
    4. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
    5. Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
    6. Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
    7. On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].

    (obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

    Options in this Menu:

    • Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
    • Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    • Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6000 is yours in particular situations.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 playback icon page 1
    Playback menu page 1
    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD card.

    View Mode

    select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.

    Select PB media

    Select what SD card slot will be used when you press playback. 

    Copy

    You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using [Select PB Media] to a memory card in another slot.

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 playback icon page 2
    Playback menu page 2
    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    Enlarge Image

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Enlarge Init. Mag.

    Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

    Enlarge Initial Pos.

    Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.

    Protect

    Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.

    MENU – playback options – page 3

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 playback icon page 3
    Playback menu page 3
    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)

    Photo Capture

    Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 setup icon page 1
    Camera setup page 1
    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Viewfinder Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Gamma Disp. Assist

    Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    MENU – Setup – page 2
    Sony ILCA-99RM2 setup icon page 2
    Camera setup page 2
    Delete confirm.

    You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.

    Display Quality

    You can change the display quality from standard to high at the expense of shorter battery life.

    Pwr Save Start Time

    Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.

    NTSC/PAL Selector

    Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

    Cleaning Mode

    If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

    Demo Mode

    The [Demo Mode] function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the camera has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select [Off].

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 setup icon page 3
    Camera setup page 3
    TC/UB settings

    Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

    • TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
    • TC Preset: Sets the time code.
    • UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
    • TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
    • TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
    • TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
    • UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
    Remote CTRL

    You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2 SEC button (2-second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.

    HDMI Settings

    When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

    • Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
    • 2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
    • 1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
    • 1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
    4K Still Output Sel.

    Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    • Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    • HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    • Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
    • MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
    • PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer
    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

    Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 setup icon page 4
    Camera setup settings page 4
    PC Remote settings

    Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.

    Language

    Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.

    Date/Time Setup

    The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A99II for the first time PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer. * MENU → (Setup) → [PC Remote Settings] → [RAW J PC Save Img] → desired setting. 1 1 MENU → (Setup) → [ Language] → desired language. or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.

    Area Settings

    Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.

    Copyright info

    Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.

    Format

    When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.

    MENU – Setup – page 5

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 setup icon page 5
    Camera setup settings page 5
    File Number

    Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

    Set File Name

    Use the standard file naming system or a customizable one.

    Select REC media

    Selects the memory card slot on which to record. [Slot 1] is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1. To record the same image on two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the image type (still image/movie), use [Recording Mode].

    Recording Mode

    You can select the method for recording an image, such as recording the same image simultaneously to two memory cards or recording different types of images to two memory cards. (If you want to record a movie to a memory card in different formats, use [Dual Video REC].)

    • Standard: Records an image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media].
    • Simult. (stills): Records a still image to both memory cards and records a movie to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media].
    • Simult. (video): Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media], and records a movie to both memory cards.
    • Simult. (stills/video ): Records a still image and a movie to both memory cards.
    • Sort(JPEG/RAW): Records an image in JPEG format to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media], and records an image in RAW format to the other memory card.
    • Sort( stills/video ): Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media], and records a movie to the other memory card.
    Select REC folder

    Selects where the camera will store newly captured images.

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.

    MENU – Setup – page 6

    Sony ILCA-99RM2 setup icon page 6
    Camera setup settings page 6
    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

    The Next Chapter is about the various shooting Modes Available, another concept that is necessary to understand fully.

    Shooting modes available via the Mode Dial 

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.

    These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.

    The Sony A99 II will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).

    Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button.

    Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).

    P (Program Auto):

    Program (P) mode automatically adjusts exposure and aperture according to your desired setting.

    See this as a more advanced iAuto mode, as you’ll be able to change all other settings through the touch screen (Focus area, creative style, exposure compensation,…);

    tip: lower the automatic ISO range to 100-1600 for better image quality (ISO-Auto range in MENU SYSTEM)

    Sony A77II VS A6000
    A99 II ISO 6400 100% crop

    A (Aperture Priority):

    Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot, for example when you want to blur the background (large aperture like f/1.8), or want a sharp corner-to-corner image (around f/5.6-f/8).

    The aperture value can be changed during movie recording, a technique that will be familiar to videographers.

    Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred (what is called Bokeh).

    Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.

    If proper exposure cannot be set, the shutter speed on the shooting screen blinks.

    S (Shutter Priority):

    The go-to mode if you can’t shoot fast-moving subjects, by manually adjusting the shutter speed. You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by changing the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of motion with a high-speed shutter, or as a trailing image with a low-speed shutter. The shutter speed can be changed while recording movies. The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

    If a correct exposure cannot be obtained, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks.

            • Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.
            • The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.
            • When the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer, noise reduction will be applied (Long Exposure noise reduction in the Menu ON/OFF) after shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open. This will temporarily freeze your camera, and you want to be able to capture images while noise reduction is in progress.
            • The brightness of the picture on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot (there is no Live view on Sony cameras for long exposures).

    M (Manual Exposure):

    Both shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed in this mode, also during movie recording.

    Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed or aperture value, then turn the control wheel to select a value.

    When ISO Auto is used, the ISO value automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.

            • If the aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not suitable for adequate exposure, the ISO value indicator will blink.
            • When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
            • The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
            • The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot.
    Bulb Mode in Manual exposure

    Bulb is the mode used to shoot a trailing picture of a subject’s’ movement with a long exposure time. Think light trails from cars, or fireworks.

            1. Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed, then turn the control wheel counterclockwise until BULB is indicated.
            2. Press the shutter button halfway down to adjust the focus.
            3. Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.
            4. As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.

    Tips:

            • Use a tripod for long exposures.
            • Use the PlayMemories remote or a wired remote control to eliminate any movement of the camera.
            • After shooting, noise reduction will be applied (as noise builds up quickly with long exposures). This will take as long as your long exposure did, and you won’t be able to use the camera until this is finished.

    Can’t get the shutter speed to Bulb Mode? Check these settings and turn them OFF:

            • Is Smile Shutter activated?
            • Is Auto HDR enabled?
            • Is Picture Effect is set to HDR Painting or Rich-tone Mono?
            • Is Drive Mode set to Cont. Shooting, Cont. Bracket or Self-timer(Cont)?

    Movie:

    Although you can capture movies in any mode, it is easiest to change all related settings for video recording here. You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.

    Press the MOVIE button to start recording and again to stop recording.

    Menu:

            • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) adjusted automatically. Other settings can be set manually, and the settings are retained.
            • Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
            • Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
            • Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

    When a zoom lens is mounted, you can also zoom by operating that lens. When a motor zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.

    Sweep Panorama:

    Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the footage.

            • Panorama mode will capture a series of images in succession.
            • You’ll be guided through this process using an arrow on-screen that shows the direction and speed of the camera panning.
            • The 6300 will automatically detect and capture the series of images while panning.
            • Afterward, it will stitch together all these pictures into a broad view of the scenery and save it as a Jpeg.

    TIP: Panorama size (standard or wide) and panning direction can be changed in the MENU–.

    Scene Selection Mode (SCN)

    Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. iAuto and Superior Auto detect these scenes automatically for you and applies the presets it deems best, and does an excellent job at that. However, in certain circumstances (when you know what you are going to capture) it is better to select the appropriate scene yourself, as it takes the guessing work out of the equation.

    The Sony A99 II has a decent range of well-designed presets:

    Portrait:

    Blurred background for a beautiful Bokeh, and sharpens the subject. How good this will look relies heavily on the lens you’re using. A zoom is less suited to this kind of photography; best use a prime, fast lens.

    This preset accentuates the skin tones softly (you can select skin softening for all Modes in the Menu system too).

    Infant:

    Soft skin tones with a high key look.

    Night Portrait:

    Shoots night scene portraits using the built-in flash.

    Night Scene:

    Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere. Will go to higher ISO values and larger apertures to achieve a useable shutter speed, enabling you to capture sharp images without blur. 

    Backlight portrait:

    for shooting portraits in heavily backlit situations. The flash will be used as a fill-flash.

    Backlight:

    Optimized preset for shooting scenes with backlight.

    Landscape:

    Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors. The camera will go to a smaller aperture to achieve this, as lenses are sharper corner-to-corner at smaller apertures.

    Macro:

    Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.

    Spotlight:

    A spotlight effect is achieved using the built-in flash.

    Low Light:

    Shoots scenes in low light at higher ISO levels with noise reduction.

    Night Scene using a tripod:

    Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere. Will go to higher ISO values and larger apertures to achieve a useable shutter speed, enabling you to capture sharp images without blur. IBIS (image stabilization) will be disabled.

    Eye AF

    You’ll need to assign this function to a button for it to work.

    MENU – Purple camera icon – page 8 –Custom Key– assign the Eye AF function to the desired button.

    The Eye AF feature will let the camera focus on the subject’s eyes while you keep the button pressed.

            1. Point the camera at a face, and push the button to which you have assigned the Eye AF
            2. Press the shutter button while pressing the button

    The Sony A99II may not be able to focus on the eyes depending on the circumstances, like when no

    Eyes can be detected within the autofocus area. In such cases, the camera focuses on the face.

    You cannot use Eye AF when the focus mode is set to C, set it to A.

    When the camera focuses on the eyes and Smile/Face Detect is on, a detection frame is.

    Displayed on the face after it is shown on the eyes. When Smile/Face Detect is off, a detection frame is affixed to the eyes.

    Live View Display

    MENU – Purple camera icon – page 6 – Live View Display – desired setting

    Live view shows your images as they’ll appear out of the camera, with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect on the screen.

            1. Setting Effect ON (default setting and Intelligent Auto, Superior Auto, Sweep Panorama, Movie or Scene Selection): Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen. Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in Manual Exposure mode.
            2. Setting Effect OFF: Shows Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect. This is useful for precisely checking your composition in particular conditions. Like when you use a third-party Flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings.

    e-Front Curtain Shut.

    MENU – Purple camera icon – page 4 – e-Front Curtain Shut – desired setting ON or OFF

     Yes the Sony A99 II has an electronic front curtain shutter! This shortens the time lag between shutter releases.

    Remember that when you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.

    When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, turn this function off. If you set this function to On, the correct exposure will not be set, or the image brightness will be uneven.

    Lens compensation features

    The Sony A99 II has a range of built-in lens compensation functions. I can see this being useful for journalism and sports shooters who want to quickly get their jpegs to their editors with the minimum amount of editing.

    Shading Comp.

    MENU – Red camera icon  page 2 – Lens Comp – Shading Comp – desired setting ( Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen caused by certain lenses.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Chromatic Aberration Compensation

    MENU -Red camera icon – page 2   page 6 – Lens Comp –  Chro. Aber. Comp  – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Reduces the colour deviation at the corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.

    Distortion Compensation

    MENU – Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Distortion Comp – desired setting (Auto or Off)

    Compensates for the distortion of the screen, caused by particular lens characteristics.

    The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses and with some cannot be turned Off.

    Memory card issues

    Some people have reported problems with certain memory cards. These problems include:

            • Unable to magnify images on the card.
            • Buffer related problems.
            • Inability to read the memory card.

    SD, SDHC, SDXC memory card and Memory Stick PRO Duo, Pro-HG Duo, PRO-HG HX Duo media are all supported.

    Make sure you:

            • Format the memory card once you’ve inserted in the camera.
            • If you’re using fast burst speeds, use a fast card (32GB 95MB/s read and 45mB/s) write is my recommendation to take advantage of A99 II FR and Buffer.
            • If you’re using larger cards (64 or 138GB), make sure you get the fastest available.
            • An SDHC UHS-I card (stands for “Ultra High Speed”) is recommended for best performance in burst mode.
            • Sandisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I cards seem to work very well.

    Conclusion

    There you have it; Sony A99 II advanced features guide. The more I use it, the more I realize how customizable this camera is.

    There is a steep learning curve, though, but referring to the manual and reading tutorials like this one will help you grasp its’ full potential.

    If you have any more questions on the Sony A99 II, feel free to comment.

    Sony A99II autofocus tips and tricks

            • The new Sony A99II autofocus capabilities are probably one of the significant improvements over the A99.
            • Its advanced AF system has 79 phase detection AF points and includes 15 cross points within the central area of the sensor.

    The new A6500 represents better value-for-money and has an autofocus system that in some ways exceed the capabilities of that in the A99II. But the added flexibility and customizability of the latter will appeal to many actions and wildlife photographers.

    We’ll go over some settings that influence the performance of the focus area settings first.

    Autofocus functions and Focus Mode dial

            • AF functionality is quickly set by the dedicated Mode Dial on the bottom left on the front of the camera.
            • The usual choice of  Single-shot AF (S), Continuous AF (C), Automatic AF (A, which switches automatically between S and C) or Manual Focus.

    Tip: Set this to Continuous AF for action photography.

    AF Track Duration

    Sony A99II autofocus

    The extent of subject-tracking duration can be fine-tuned in five steps in AF-C mode.

            1. A low setting is best for slow-moving subjects with predictable movements.
            2. A high setting delivers more responsive focusing for shooting different subjects at different distances, such as wildlife or sports photography.

    These settings are also available in Full HD movie shooting. Tip: It might be a good idea to assign this to a button you don’t use much, or at least adjust this setting depending on the shooting conditions.

    AF Drive speed

    Sony A99II autofocus

    AF drive speed is switchable between slow and fast.

    Slow mode

            • This method is best used for critical focusing. It’s linked to the rate at which the camera acquires key focus, either when the lens has to bridge a significant change in focus distance, or when the conditions force the camera to hunt when trying to lock-on.
            • Different lenses behave differently, for instance; a wide prime lens has much less travel than a telephoto.
            • The main advantage of the slow mode is to cut down on hunting in low light and with tricky subjects. Overall focus speed is only slightly affected.
            • Slow mode just takes a tiny bit more care, when approaching focus lock, not to overshoot or miss minor details in certain conditions.

    Fast Mode

            • Sports and action photography might benefit from using Fast.
            • Note that switching from slow to fast does not necessarily mean you’ll get better results, as focus acquisition might differ only in the order of microseconds, which may be insignificant.

    Drive mode settings

    Much depends on your drive mode settings.

            • I found that in Continuous Shooting Lo, the camera performs better with AF Drive Speed set to Fast.
            • In Continuous Shooting Hi, I got the best results when AF Drive Speed was set to Slow.

     AF range control

    This feature is accessible via the C button.

            1. The AF range control allows you manually to select a foreground and background distance to which the AF system will not respond.
            2. This is similar to the focus limiter on some zoom lenses that restricts the range of distance the camera will attempt to focus on.

    Tip: This in-camera feature is especially useful for shooting fast-moving subjects with a complex background that commonly distract camera AF systems.

    Center Lock-On AF

            • Turning on Center lock-On AF in the menu enables a feature where you can use the Multi-controller centre button to tell the camera on what to focus.

    Procedure: frame your image so that your subject is in the centre, press the Multi-controller to select that is what you want to focus on, and it will follow your subject.Pressing the Multi-controller middle button twice will cancel your selection. This software can recognise and track an item based on colour and position.The active AF area is illuminated in white upon focus lock as a visual reminder of which point was manually selected.

            • Tip: An interesting aspect of this feature is that if you lose track of the subject, it can resume the Lock-on AF function when the subject re-appears on the screen.
            1. Activating the Center Lock-on AF with the Multi-controller centre button (when Center Lock-On AF is set to ON) will override your selected Focus Area when your subject moves beyond the area and reverts to the Wide Focus Area.
            2. Deactivating it will go back to your selected Focus Area. It is not always dependable for fast-moving subjects, but it is a great way of reverting to Wide Focus area in whatever Mode you are (except Lock-on AF Wide) when your subject moves beyond that field.

    This does change the function of the Multi-controller middle button in all modes (except Lock-on AF Wide) as when it is OFF; it acts as a centre focus button.

            • Tip: After some experimentation, I found that switching it OFF yielded better results, as I prefer having the option of a dedicated centre focus button as opposed to a lock-on follow focus button. Before going to the selectable Focus Area settings, you should know that all selective zone Focus Area settings are easily adjustable on-the-fly to other areas using the Multi-controller.

    Focus areas

    Sony A99II autofocus

            • There are a six different Sony A99II autofocus area settings selectable.
            • For subject tracking in action photography, the Expanded flexible spot placed in the centre and physically tracking your subject after locking on with a half-press of the shutter button will generate the most number of in-focus images.

    Tip: This mode activates adjacent points if it is in danger of losing focus, a very useful feature.

    Wide focus area

    The default option is the 79 point Wide Focus mode.

            • When using this mode, the camera decides which of the focus points to use to set the focus.
            • This method is somewhat random, in the sense that it will lock-on to any movement in your image.
            • If you have a lot of activity going on with different subjects, it will switch to any of the 79 focus points depending on what the camera thinks you want to lock-on too.

    Great if you don’t mind what is in focus (as long as something is) but not so great if you want to track one subject.

    Zone

            • The 72 AF points are divided into 9 zones.
            • The three horizontal zones count 9 points while the two vertical zones adjacent to the centre each count 7 and the four corners each have 8.
            • Zone mode lets you choose one of these 9.
            • The camera will autofocus in the same way as the wide focus area, but only in the selected zone.

    Tip: Works well if you find the wide focus area setting too unstable in focussing on what you want, but you still want the camera to do some follow focusing without physically moving the A99II itself too much. Remember that you can always quickly switch to different zones using the Multi-controller.

    Center

            • Setting your focus are to one centre spot, limits it to focussing on that centre spot in the middle of the frame.
            • If all else fails, using centre spot focus and tracking the subject yourself (keeping it in the middle of the frame ) is a proven technique of keeping focus.

    Tip: Expanded flexible spot does the same with the added benefit of switching to adjacent points.

    Flexible spot

     

            • Flexible Spot is a manual AF area selection mode and lets you manually set the main AF point by using the Multi-controller to highlight one of the 15 points.
            • This is comparable to the Center mode, except without the benefits of the dedicated centrally mounted AF sensor.

    Related: Flexible spot points

    Sony A99II autofocus

            • A similar setting For both Flexible Spot and Expanded Flexible Spot is Flexible Spot Points.
            • You can select if you want to use all AF area points or just 15 points spread out over the entire AF area.

    Tip: I’d recommend setting it to 15 points and Expanded Flexible Spot if you want to use a Flexible spot zone, as this area setting activates surrounding AF points if it loses focus anyway.

     Expanded flexible spot

     

            • Expanded Flexible Spot mode keeps focusing steadily even if the selected AF point loses track of the subject, by activating eight surrounding AF points that recognise the subject.
            • This is my favourite setting for action photography, as it gives you the most control over what the A99 MII is focussing on

    It’s easy to run through the flexible spots (more so if you’ve set the limit to 15 Flexible Spots). Tip:

            1. switch to other zones by using the Multi-controller
            2. pressing the Multi-controller button puts focus on the centre of your frame

    Lock-on AF: Wide

            • Using all AF points, the camera will try to identify your target and follow it as the target moves in all directions.
            • It adjusts target frame size based on subject characteristics and makes use of the optimal AF point for the smoothest possible autofocus. Just press the shutter to activate it.

    Tip Works well if your scene is not too busy, and is what I would call one of the advanced functions of the  A99 M2.

    Firmware updates

    If you want to update to firmware version 1.01 on OSX Mojave and the usual way is not working:

    1. Open the .dmg file as usual
    2. Click on the “resources” folder
    3. hold down “control” and click on the “Systemsoftwareupdater” file
    4. click on ‘ShowPackage contents
    5. Open the folder and navigate to the “MacOS” folder
    6. Click on the “SystemSoftwareUpdater”
    7. run the software update as usual from here on
  • Sony A6300: settings, tips and tricks

    Sony A6300: settings, tips, and tricks

    Introduction

    This post is a guide for the Sony A6300 with tips and tricks. This advanced manual is easiest to navigate if you have your camera with you and simply follow along with the Menu structure.

    Quick camera description: The Sony A6300 is a versatile APS-C format camera system designed for the semi-pro and amateur photographer. The camera has a re-developed 24.2 megapixel Exmor CMOS sensor that uses copper wiring to reduce noise and facilitate faster sensor readout speeds. Photographers will also benefit from the fast BIONZ X processor, which provides continuous shooting of 11 fps to 21 raw frames in burst as well as 14-bit RAW file output. Autofocus has also improved compared to earlier models and now has what Sony calls 4D FOCUS, which combines an extensive 425-point phase detection with 169-area contrast detection system.  This new algorithm also allows for more efficient and accurate tracking of moving objects on the extremes of the picture frame. 

    Sony A6300

    If you are looking for an an A6000,  A6100A6300, A6400, A6500 or A6600 guide, you can find them by clicking on the camera name.

    Although this is a relatively easy camera to use, it is still very customizable, and this might seem daunting at first.

    No worries, I’ve assembled a guide to essential functions of the Sony A6300, including some tips and tricks.

    First things fist: setting up your camera for your use and getting to know the MENU system.

    Diving into the MENU system

    When you switch on your Sony A6300, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time, and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.

    After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.

    We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon camera settings

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 1

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Image size:

    Large, medium or small is selectable when you set Quality to jpeg. Set it to large for optimal quality, if SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.

    Aspect ratio:

    You can choose 3:2 which uses the full sensor surface or 16:9 crop but a more broad view. Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.

    Quality:

    Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.

    A jpeg is a compressed image available in FINE larger and STANDARD smaller, less quality which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterwards. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your use.

    Panorama size

    when in panorama shooting mode Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the Sony A6300 to do efficiently.

    Panorama direction

    A panorama picture only available in jpeg is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the camera to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu either, up, down, left or right

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 2

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    File Format video

    You can choose between XAVC S, AVCHD or MP4. AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4.  AVCHD is based on MP4 but is a much cleaner, much more advanced.

    You have the following compression options:  XAVC S: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 AVCHD: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 MP4: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

    Record Setting  video:

    You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality.

    When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:

    • 60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 fields/sec for 1080 60i-compatible devices or 50 fields/sec for 1080 50i-compatible devices, in interlaced mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec for 1080 60i-compatible devices or 25 frames/sec for 1080 50i-compatible devices, in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
    • 60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec for 1080 60i-compatible devices or 50 frames/sec for 1080 50i-compatible devices, in progressive mode, with Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.

    When File Format is set to MP4, movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 30 frames/sec for 1080 60i-compatible devices or about 25 frames/sec for 1080 50i-compatible devices, in progressive mode, with AAC audio, mp4 format.

    Zeiss Touit Sony A6300

    HFR Settings

    This setting is used for shooting super slow movies. By shooting with a higher frame rate than the recording format, you can record a smooth super-slow-motion video.

    Select the desired settings for HFR Record Setting like Frame Rate], HFR Priority Setting], and HFR REC Timing. You can set other shooting settings such as focus area, focus mode, and frame rate, and perform zooming on the HFR setting screen.

    As a shortcut, all you need to do is press the center of the control wheel while in movie mode to enter the HFR shooting screen. Once set up, use the regular Movie button to start your slow motion recording.

    These are the available settings within the HFR Menu:

    • Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the film from 60p 50M, 50p 50M, 30p 50M, 25p 50M or 24p 50M last one only available when set to NTSC
    • Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate from 240fps, 250fps, 480fps, 500fps, 960fps, and 1000fps.The larger the number, the slower your recording will be.
    • Priority Setting: Select Quality Priority or Shoot Time Priority. If you select Shoot Time Priority, the recordable duration is longer than it would be in in Quality Priority mode.
    • HFR REC Timing: Selects whether to record a set amount of time after pressing the MOVIE button or if you want to record for a set amount of time until you press the MOVIE button.
    Drive Mode

    Do you want to take a single picture when you press the shutter button or multiple images? You can select this here, as well as self-timer functions and bracketing.

    Bracketing is taking a series of pictures, each with different settings, useful for combining your images with various exposures for HDR effects in software afterwards, to name just one example.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 3

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Flash Mode:

    Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button

    As the A6300 has a pop-up flash, you might want to get into the different Flash Modes. If you’re new to photography, I’d suggest setting it to Auto, where the Sony A6300 will decide when and how you need the flash.

    If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:

    • fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light like a person in the shade.
    • Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the Sony A6300 to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
    • Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
    • Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M with TTL!. Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.
    Flash comp or Flash compensation:

    Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button

    Red Eye Reduction:

    This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash

    Focus Mode

    Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select see next

    • AF-S: With a half-press of the shutter button, the Sony A6300 will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.
    • AF-A: AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard setting and the easiest to use.
    • AF-C: The camera will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.
    • DMF: The ILCE-6300 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.
    • MF: No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.
    Focus area

    The Sony 6300 sensor has a dual phase/contrast detect system embedded in the sensor itself, covering over 90% of it. This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in a compact camera and is even better than some AF systems in cameras that cost over three times as much. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting as this uses all AF points, but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.

    • Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
    • Zone: Zone allows you to select one of 9 predefined areas where autofocus will be active. These zones each cover about 25% of the screen, with a slight overlap. You can quickly change the area by pressing the multi-controller button and navigating to any of the other areas.
    • Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centred.
    • Flexible spot: Flexible spot area selects a place anywhere on the screen where the Sony A6300 should focus. similar to Center spot, except not.. in the centre  You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when setting to small except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye
    AF illuminator

    The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony A6300 to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 4

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    AF Drive speed Movie mode

    You can select the autofocus speed to Fast, Normal or Slow. You might think faster is better, but in real life, you’ll often find that Fast focusses on any slight movement and that it’s best to set it to Normal or Slow.

    If you conclude that the Sony A6300 does not focus fast enough for your needs, this setting and the next are worth experimenting with!

    AF track sens Movie mode:

    High is useful when recording movies with fast action scenery. The Normal mode works fine in most situations.

    Exposure Comp

    Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button:

    If you find that your image is overexposed for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight, you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 exact EV dependent on next step range.

    A6300 landscape

    Exposure Step:

    This determines the Exposure Compensation levels, used to darken or lighten the exposure if you feel the auto setting isn’t giving you the right ‘mood.’ The hard clicks on that wheel to the right of your top plate can be changed from 0.5EV to  0.3EV steps for a more precise control.

    ISO

    You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.

    I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO,  you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….

    Iso Auto Min SS.

    This is a useful and exciting setting. If you select ISO AUTO you are in  P Program Auto or A Aperture Priority mode; you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.

    You have three possibilities here:

    • FASTER Faster/FAST Fast: The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard normal. This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the camera is capable of doing so.
    • STD Standard: The Sony A6300 automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
    • SLOW Slow/SLOWER Slower: The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 5

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Metering Mode

    Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.

    In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in-camera.

    In spot or centre, the Sony A6300 only considers what is in that spot or the centre per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image.

    White Balance

    You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions customises the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.

    DRO/Auto HDR
    DRO:

    This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.

    Auto HDR:

    not available for RAW captures this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.

    The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.

    Creative Style

    The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations as it some other camera manufacturers implement this. There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.

    Sony A6300 landscape photography

    Picture Effect

    Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony A6300, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg Not in RAW.

    Picture Profile movie

    You can change the settings for the color, gradation and detail for movies here.  As your picture profile will mostly set the mood, look and feel of your film, it’s a critical setting. You’ll find a bunch of Sony preset picture profiles here, but it’s also possible to fully customise this if you want to.  

    These are the available settings:

    • Black Level Sets the black level from –15 to +15.
    • Gamma Selects a gamma curve. Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies. Still: Standard gamma curve for still images. Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie. equivalent to HG4609G33. Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. equal to HG4600G30. Cine3 Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and [Cine2] and strengthens gradation in black. Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3]. The contrast in dark parts is lower, and the contrast in bright regions is higher than for [Movie]. ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU-709. ITU709800%: Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2]. S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the premise that the picture will be processed after shooting.
    • Black Gamma: Corrects gamma in low-intensity areas.Range: Selects the correcting range. Wide / Middle / Narrow Level: Sets the correcting level. -7 maximum black compression to +7 maximum black stretch
    • Knee: Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
    • Mode: Selects Auto/manual settings. Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically. Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
    • Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected. Max Point: Sets the maximum position of the knee point. 90% to 100% Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity. High / Mid / Low Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected.  Point: Sets the knee point. 75% to 105% Slope Sets the knee slope. -5 gentle to +5 steep
    • Color Mode: Sets type and level of colors. Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie]. Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1]. Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras when combined with ITU-709 gamma. ITU709 Matrix: Colors are corresponding to ITU-709 standard when combined with ITU-709 gamma Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
    • Saturation Sets the color saturation from-32 to +32.
    • Color Phase Sets the color phase from -7 to +7.
    • Color Depth: Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].[R] -7 light red to +7 deep red, [G] -7 light green to +7 deep green , [B] -7 light blue to +7 deep blue , [C] -7 light cyan to +7 deep cyan , [M] -7 light magenta to +7 deep magenta ,[Y] -7 light yellow to +7 deep yellow.
    • Detail Sets items for Detail. Level: Sets the [Detail] level. -7 to +7 Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.Mode: Selects Auto/manual setting. Auto automatic optimization / Manual The details are set manually. V/H Balance: Sets the vertical V and horizontal H balance of DETAIL. -2 off to the vertical V side to +2 off to the horizontal H side. B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL B and the upper DETAIL W. Type1 off to the lower DETAIL B side to Type 5 off to the upper DETAIL W sideLimit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. 0 Low limit level: likely to be limited to 7 High limit level: unlikely to be limited. Crispening: Sets the crispening level. 0 shallow crispening level to 7 deep crispening level. Hi-Light Detail Sets the [Detail] level in the high-intensity areas. 0 to 4

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 6

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Zoom

    Settings for the digital zoom functionality. I would not recommend using the digital zoom feature, as it deteriorates image quality.

    Focus Magnifier

    When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the Sony A6300 to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.

    Long Exposure NR

    Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.

    High ISO NR

    Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings when quality is set to jpeg. As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values

    Center Lock-on AF

    This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In iAuto mode, you can access this feature when turned ON and camera is set to AF by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then centre your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.

    Smile/Face Detect

    This is another powerful feature. It can be set to detect automatically and focus on registered faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the camera will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool, along with the pivoting screen.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 7

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Soft Skin Effect

    If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. only available when quality is set to Jpeg

    Auto Object Framing

    When enabled, the Sony 6300 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.

    Scene Selection

    This is more easily controlled via the right thumb wheel when you’re in SCN mode, but you can also select the presets for different scenes like sports or portrait from here.

    Movie

    The ILCE-6300 has a dedicated movie shooting mode. In this mode accessed via the mode dial you can either select Program, Aperture, Shutter speed priority or full manual mode. These methods offer the same functionality as the modes on the mode dial see explanation further down only in movie mode.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 8

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    SteadyShot

    You can turn the lens image stabilisation ON or OFF here. Should be OFF for taking time-lapses with the app for example.

    Color Space

    You can choose between Standard and Adobe extended colour range RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended colour range.

    Auto Slow Shutter movie mode

    Sets whether to adjust the shutter speed automatically during video recording in case if the subject is dark/ Set to ON.

    Audio Recording

    You can switch off audio recording in movie mode.

    Wind Noise Reduction

    This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.

    MENU – Camera Settings – page 9

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Memory

    You can save three often used presets to the memory in this menu, and later recall any of these using the MR shooting mode dial.

    MENU – Custom settings wheel – page 1

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Zebra

    The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the full picture. As I capture in RAW, I am very careful not to have any highlight clipping, to be able to possibly fully recover highlights in Lightroom.

    MF assist

    This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier on Page 5 of the camera settings. You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus MF. MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.

    Focus Magnif Time

    You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.

    AF in Focus Magnif Time

    You can choose to use Focus magnification while in Autofocus mode too. Here, you can adjust the duration of Magnification while in AF mode.

    Grid Line

    Having a grid line on your screen is a helpful aide for the composition of your image.

    The human brain is hard-wired to recognise structure and most people find a well-composed image more eye-pleasing.

    During photography history, rules have been developed on how to best compose the different elements within a scene. Many landscapes you’ll see have the horizon run through the middle of the image for instance, but this is just composition in its simplest form. Many photographers with a thorough understanding of these techniques go far beyond that.

    A good starting point is using the in-camera grid to make your brain aware of the possibilities in composition.

    The Rules of 3rds, Square and Diag +square are available in the Sony Alpha ILCE-6300.

    Marker Display

    Select if you want guidelines in movie mode.

    MENU – Custom settings wheel – page 2

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Marker Settings

    Same settings as the Grid Line on the previous page, except for movie mode.

    Audio Level Display

    Select if you and how you want sound levels displayed on your screen for video recording.

    Auto Review

    Choose the amount of time the Sony A6300 shows your image directly after capturing the image. 10, 5 and 2 sec is available, or you can turn this feature OFF if it annoys you.

    Disp button

    Selects the functionality what is shown on the screen when you press the DISP button on the control wheel. You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.

    Peaking Level
    • Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your Sony A6300 set to MF or DMF.
    • You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
    • Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualise what you’re focusing on.
    Peaking Color

    You can choose the colour of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.

    MENU – Custom settings wheel – page 3

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Exposure set guide

    Sets the guide displayed when exposure settings are changed in the shooting screen.  Excellent tool when you’re getting to know the functionality of your new camera. If you’re familiar with Sony’s feature, turn it OFF.

    AF Area auto clear

    Sets, whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved. On or Off.

    Live view Display

    Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialled in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL through the lens functionality.

    Disp cont AF Area

    You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when[Focus Area] is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.

    Pre AF

    When pre-AF is set to ON, the Sony A6300 will continuously focus, even without half-pressing the shutter button. This can be draining to the battery, especially when using some lenses like the Zeiss Touit range. Set it to OFF.

    Zoom settings

    Set to Optical zoom only using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens

    Two other settings are available which use digital zoom cropping of the original image:

    Digital zoom:

    Pictures captured by the image sensor of the camera are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.

    Clear Image Zoom:

    Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The Sony A6300 first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the camera uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.

    MENU – Custom settings wheel – page 4

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Eye Start AF

    This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.

    Finder/Monitor

    You can set the behaviour of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder?  Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.

    Release without lens

    Makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the camera. Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses

    Release without card

    If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.

    MENU – custom Settings – page 5

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Priority Set in AF-S

    Sets if you want to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF, and the subject is still.

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced focus on both focusing and shutter release.
    Priority Set in AF-C

    Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion.

    • AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
    • Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
    • Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

    Sony A6300

    AF with shutter

    Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.

    AEL w shutter
    • Auto default setting: Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
    • On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
    • Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.

    The camera keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.

    E-Front curtain shutter

    The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, ghosting of a blurred area may occur. In such cases, set this function to Off. When you’re using non-Sony lenses, it’s best to disable this too, as you can get incorrect exposures when using the e-front curtain shutter with those lenses.

    MENU – custom Settings – page 6

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    S Auto Img Extract

    When in Superior Auto, the Sony A6300 takes multiple images and combines them into one jpeg only. You can either save all images captured OFF or only the combined image ON. Turn it OFF; I’ve tried this functionality, and the combined image feature does not work well.

    Exp comp set

    Selects if the Exposure compensation function +-5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash.

    Face Registration

    You probably know that the A6300 has a face recognition feature. To further enhance the effectiveness of face recognition, you can register up to eight faces and organise them to give one priority over another. This is an impressive functionality, as you can register faces of your subject like at a wedding the bride and groom and the camera will automatically detect these registered faces and give autofocus priority to them. You can register up to 8 faces by taking a picture of them within this menu and set a priority order.

    Works well, and helps to get the right people in-focus in busy shots.

    AF Micro Adj.

    The AF Micro Adjustment function allows you to adjust and register an auto-focused position of an A-mount lens attached with the LA-EA4 mount adaptor. You can use a lens alignment tool like the Datacolor Spyderlenscal to do this.

    This is the procedure

    1. Select AF Micro Adj.
    2. Select AF Adjustment Setting.
    3. Select On.
    4. Select Amount.
    5. Turn the control wheel to adjust the value.
    6. Press the center button on the control wheel when finished.
    Lens Comp

    The A6300 allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations shading, chromatic aberration, distortion even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON.

    MENU – custom Settings – page 7

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    On Page 7, you’ll find all customisable keys and functions of the Sony 6300 buttons and wheels. The Function Menu allows for quick access to the most-used settings like ISO, focus area, flash functionality, etc.

    Function Menu Set.

    You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn Function button. In the Fn menu, I use the top portion to be dedicated to video settings and the bottom portion for still photography needs.

    Custom KeyShoot./Custom KeyPB

    You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, if you assign [Eye AF] to [Center Button] for [Custom KeyShoot.], you can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the center of the multi-selector while shooting.

    The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom KeyShoot.] and [Custom KeyPB].

    You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.

    • Custom Button 1
    • Custom Button2
    • AF/MF Button/AEL Button
    • Fn/ Button
    • Control Wheel Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button
    • Custom Button 3
    Dial Setup

    You can switch the functions of the dial dial between shutter speed and aperture.

    Dial Ev Comp

    You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.

    MENU – Custom Settings – page 8

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    MOVIE Button

    Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE Movie button.

    • Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
    • Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie/S&Q Motion] mode.
    Dial / Wheel Lock

    You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn Function button.

    Lock

      : Locks the control dial and control wheel.

    Unlock 

      • default setting: Does not lock the control dial or control wheel even if you press and hold the

    Fn

       Function button.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 1

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Send To Smartphone
    • You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device phone or tablet by pressing this button.
    • You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or the wireless device via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store.
    • You’ll have to connect Sony A6300 via Wifi first it makes a Wifi access point, using the instruction on the A6300 screen.
    • It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
    • You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
    • When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
    Send to Computer

    You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software installed from the CD or downloaded from their website. This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the Sony A6300 has turned off.

    Zeiss Touit Sony A6300

    View On TV

    If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.

    One Touch NFC

    Enables Quick, one-touch connection as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app with NFC near-field communication capable devices.

    I have not tried this as my iPhone does not have NFC, but it looks a lot easier to use.

    Airplane Mode

    Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.

    MENU – Wireless functionality – page 2

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    WPS Push

    If your access point has the WPS button, you can register the access point to the camera quickly by pushing the WPS button.

    Access Point Set

    Here you can setup an access point for your Sony A6300 to the internet.

    It enables the Sony ILCE-6300 to install PlayMemories apps directly from the web. Works just like setting an access point WiFi connection on your phone.

    Edit Device name

    If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point perhaps to make it easier to identify which A6000 is yours in particular situations.

    Disp MAC address

    You can see the MAC address of the camera here, might be useful for some advanced configuration or troubleshooting

    SSID, password reset

    Reset the name and password of the wireless network the Sony A6300 creates.

    Reset Network set

    Resets all network settings.

    If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.

    MENU – Application List Menu

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    You’ll find The Smart remote control camera app which allows you to use your phone as a remote control via PlayMemories phone app for iPhone and Android and the Playmemories Camera app here.

    You can access your online PlayMemories account here, or create an account once you’ve set up your camera connection with your Wifi network.

    You’ll also be able to download new apps available for purchase in the Sony Playmemories online app store like the Time-lapse and smooth reflection app.

    If you do not want to connect your camera to the internet, you can always install new apps and updates if you connect the camera to your Mac or PC with the supplied USB cable, using the Sony PlayMemories desktop application.

    MENU – playback options – page 1

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Delete

    Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD card.

    View Mode

    select how the Sony A6300 will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.

    Image Index

    Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 larger or 30 smaller images per page.

    Display rotation

    Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the Sony A6300 or not.

    Slide Show

    Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.

    Rotate

    Change the orientation of images in-camera.

    MENU – playback options – page 2

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Enlarge

    Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.

    Protect

    Protect images selectable or per date from accidentally being erased

    Specify Printing

    Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format

    MENU – Setup – page 1

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Monitor Brightness

    Manually set the Monitor brightness recommended leave to zero or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.

    Monitor Brightness

    Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting. There are color and grayscale charts displayed on the screen to allow you to set it up to your liking.

    Finder Color Temp

    Change the color temperature of the viewfinder colder-warmer to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.

    Volume settings

    Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.

    Audio Signals

    You can turn off audio signals like the beep when the Sony A6300 achieves focus. Useful if you want a more clandestine operation although you’ll still hear the second curtain shutter.

    MENU – Setup – page 2

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Title Menu

    choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a linear tab style menu layout.

    Mode Dial Guide

    Turn the description for each shooting mode ON or OFF. Can be handy at first for a novice user to get familiar with what the different shooting modes do.

    Delete Confirm

    When deleting images on your SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion to make sure you don’t accidentally delete anything. You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.

    Pwr Save Start time

    Selects the time it takes for the camera to go into sleep mode if you don’t use it.

    MENU – Setup – page 3

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    PAL/NTSC mode

    change to either of this broadcasting standards according to which region of the world you live in.

    Cleaning Mode

    Sets your camera in sensor ultrasonic cleaning mode. If you put your ear to it, you’ll hear some mechanical movement followed by some high-frequency squeaks.

    Demo mode

    A demo, mainly used in stores. Nothing to worry your pretty little head about.

    TC/UB settings

    Timecode TC and the user bit UB information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.

    Remote CTRL

    When the Sony A6300 is connected via USB to a PC, you can use the Remote Camera Control RCC software to take pictures or change settings on the Sony A6300 from the computer. Both Mac and PC versions downloadable via the Sony website. If you would like to do so, you’ll need to turn this ON here. There is now a special version of Capture One available free for Sony cameras which also has this functionality.

    MENU – Setup – page 4

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    HDMI Settings

    You’ll find all the HDMI settings here:

    • HDMI Resolution: Set the Resolution of images and video sent to your TV with an HDMI cable 1080p or 1080i
    • CTRL for HDMI: With the “Control for HDMI” function, Sony BRAVIA Sync helps communicate with BRAVIA Sync-compatible equipment using HDMI CEC.
    • HDMI Info display: another feature for viewing images and video on a TV through HDMI connection. Select whether to show the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable.
    4K Still Output Sel.

    Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.

    USB connection

    Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.

    USB LUN Setting

    Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.

    Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony A6300 might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.

    USB Power Supply

    You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.

    MENU – Setup – page 5

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Language

    Set your preferred language. The advantage of setting it to English is that you’ll find much more information online when you need any troubleshooting.

    Date Time Setup

    Change date, time, date format and Daylight savings time

    Area setting

    Select your region, or change area when abroad, the camera will automatically change time and date for you.

    Copyright Info

    You can add your credentials here, and this will be written in the Metadata of every image taken with this camera.

    Format

    Format your SD card before use; this will erase any images still on the memory card.

    File Number

    Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.

    MENU – Setup – page 6

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Set File Name
    Use the standard file naming system, or a customizable one.
    Select REC folder

    Selects where the camera will store newly captured images

    New Folder

    Make a new folder for quickly organising events and locations

    Folder name

    Choose whether to have folder names in standard form DSC or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organising your images easier.

    Recover Image DB

    If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.

    Display media info

    You can check how much space is left on your SD card have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video

    MENU – Setup – page 7

    Sony A6300 settings, tips, tricks

    Version

    Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.

    Setting Reset

    Fully resets the camera to factory settings.

    The Next Chapter is about the various shooting Modes Available, another concept that is necessary to understand fully.

    Shooting modes available via the Mode Dial or via MENU – Camera Settings – Shoot Mode- desired setting

    Intelligent Auto:

    This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognised scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.

    These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.

    The Sony A6300 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though.

    Drive Mode single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi, Self-timer and Self-timer cont multiple images with the self-timer can be changed by using the Fn button.

    Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 you can’t change the range.

    Superior Auto:

    Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing.

    This includes composite layering layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image.

    You can either choose whether you want the Sony A6300 to save all images captured or just the composite image, by selecting S. Auto Img. Extract in the MENU system.

    Disadvantage: ISO range is like in iAuto fixed and only useable for jpeg shooting.

    P Program Auto:

    Program P mode automatically adjusts exposure and aperture according to your desired setting.

    See this as a more advanced iAuto mode, as you’ll be able to change all other settings through the touch screen Focus area, creative style, exposure compensation,…;

    tip: lower the automatic ISO range to 100-1600 for better image quality ISO-Auto range in MENU SYSTEM

    Sony A77II VS A6000
    A6300 ISO 1600

    A Aperture Priority:

    Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot, for example when you want to blur the background large aperture like f/1.8, or want a sharp corner-to-corner image around f/5.6-f/8.

    The aperture value can be changed during movie recording, a technique that will be familiar to videographers.

    Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred what is called Bokeh.

    Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.

    If proper exposure cannot be set, the shutter speed on the shooting screen blinks.

    S Shutter Priority:

    The go-to mode if you can’t shoot fast-moving subjects, by manually adjusting the shutter speed. You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by changing the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of motion with a high-speed shutter, or as a trailing image with a low-speed shutter. The shutter speed can be changed while recording movies. The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

    If a correct exposure cannot be obtained, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks.

    • Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.
    • The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.
    • When the shutter speed is 1 seconds or longer, noise reduction will be applied Long Exposure noise reduction in the Menu ON/OFF after shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open. This will temporarily freeze your camera, and you want to be able to capture images while noise reduction is in progress.
    • The brightness of the picture on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot there is no Live view on Sony cameras for long exposures.

    M Manual Exposure:

    Both shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed in this mode, also during movie recording.

    Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed or aperture value, then turn the control wheel to select a value.

    When ISO Auto is used, the ISO value automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.

    • If the aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not suitable for adequate exposure, the ISO value indicator will blink.
    • When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
    • The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
    • The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot.
    Bulb Mode in Manual exposure

    Bulb is the mode used to shoot a trailing picture of a subject’s’ movement with a long exposure time. Think light trails from cars, or fireworks.

    1. Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed, then turn the control wheel counterclockwise until BULB is indicated.
    2. Press the shutter button halfway down to adjust the focus.
    3. Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.
    4. As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.

    Tips:

    • Use a tripod for long exposures.
    • Use the PlayMemories remote or a wired remote control to eliminate any movement of the camera.
    • After shooting, noise reduction will be applied as noise builds up quickly with long exposures. This will take as long as your long exposure did, and you won’t be able to use the Sony A6300 until this is finished.

    Can’t get the shutter speed to Bulb Mode? Check these settings and turn them OFF:

    • Is Smile Shutter activated?
    • Is Auto HDR enabled?
    • Is Picture Effect is set to HDR Painting or Rich-tone Mono?
    • Is Drive Mode set to Cont. Shooting, Cont. Bracket or Self-timerCont?

    Movie:

    Although you can capture movies in any mode, it is easiest to change all related settings for video recording here. You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.

    Press the MOVIE button to start recording and again to stop recording

    Menu:

    • Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure both the shutter speed and the aperture value adjusted automatically. Other settings can be set manually, and the settings are retained.
    • Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
    • Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
    • Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure both the shutter speed and the aperture value manually.

    When a zoom lens is mounted, you can also zoom by operating that lens. When a motor zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.

    Sweep Panorama:

    Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the footage.

    • Panorama mode will capture a series of images in succession.
    • You’ll be guided through this process using an arrow on-screen that shows the direction and speed of the camera panning.
    • The 6300 will automatically detect and capture the series of images while panning.
    • Afterwards, it will stitch together all these pictures into a broad view of the scenery and save it as a Jpeg.

    TIP: Panorama size standard or wide and panning direction can be changed in the MENU on page 1.

    Scene Selection Mode SCN

    Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. iAuto and Superior Auto detect these scenes automatically for you and applies the presets it deems best, and does an excellent job at that. However, in certain circumstances when you know what you are going to capture it is better to select the appropriate scene yourself, as it takes the guessing work out of the equation.

    The Sony A6300 has a decent range of well-designed presets:

    Portrait:

    Blurred background for a beautiful Bokeh, and sharpens the subject. How good this will look relies heavily on the lens you’re using. A zoom is less suited to this kind of photography; best use a prime, fast lens.

    This preset accentuates the skin tones softly you can select skin softening for all Modes in the Menu system too.

    Sports Action:

    Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed lso that the subject looks as if it is standing still. AF-C and continuous shooting hi is on, so you’ll be able to snap away while the shutter button is pressed.

    Macro:

    Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.

    Landscape:

    Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colours. The Sony A6300 will go to a smaller aperture to achieve this, as lenses are sharper corner-to-corner at smaller apertures.

    Sunset:

    Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.

    Night Scene:

    Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere. Will go to higher ISO values and larger apertures to achieve a useable shutter speed, enabling you to capture sharp images without blur. The A6300 does have its limitations when it comes to shooting dark scenery.

    Hand-held Twilight:

    Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise. This does not work well in my opinion.

    Night Portrait:

    Shoots night scene portraits using the built-in flash.

    Anti Motion Blur:

    Shutter Priority mode, which will use the fastest shutter speed possible, to counter motion blur.

    Sony A6300

    Conclusion

    The Sony ILCE-6300 is certainly an accomplished camera, and image quality rivals that of the A7 and A77II. At this price-point, that is almost unbelievable, and I’m sure many novice photographers will jump at the chance to get all this technology.

    You’ll probably start using it in iAuto mode, and this is well-implemented, except for the fact that the ISO range cannot be changed. After you’ve familiarised yourself with this method, it is well worth getting to know the advanced functionality of the Sony A6300, as it often will yield better results than just setting it to iAuto.

    If you have any questions, feel free to comment below.